YorkDoc 150.72-nm3

AIR-COOLED SCROLL CHILLER
INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE Supersedes 150.72-NM3 (909) Form 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21911-001
YLAA0195 - YLAA0515
AIR-COOLED SCROLL CHILLERS
WITH MICROCHANNEL CONDENSER COILS
STYLE A (50 HZ)
57 - 142 TON
R-410A
Issue Date: Products are produced at a

facility whose quality-
management systems are
August 15, 2011 ISO9001 certified.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

ISSUE DATE 8/15/2011
IMPORTANT!
READ BEFORE PROCEEDING!
GENERAL SAFETY GUIDELINES
This equipment is a relatively complicated apparatus. which it is situated, as well as severe personal injury or
During installation, operation, maintenance or service, death to themselves and people at the site.
individuals may be exposed to certain components or
conditions including, but not limited to: refrigerants, This document is intended for use by owner-authorized
oils, materials under pressure, rotating components, operating/service personnel. It is expected that this
and both high and low voltage. Each of these items individual possesses independent training that will
has the potential, if misused or handled improperly, to enable them to perform their assigned tasks properly
cause bodily injury or death. It is the obligation and and safely. It is essential that, prior to performing any
responsibility of operating/service personnel to identify task on this equipment, this individual shall have read
and recognize these inherent hazards, protect themselves, and understood this document and any referenced
and proceed safely in completing their tasks. Failure to materials. This individual shall also be familiar with and
comply with any of these requirements could result in comply with all applicable governmental standards and
serious damage to the equipment and the property in regulations pertaining to the task in question.
SAFETY SYMBOLS
The following symbols are used in this document to alert the reader to areas of potential hazard:
DANGER indicates an imminently CAUTION identifies a hazard which

hazardous situation which, if not could lead to damage to the machine,
avoided, will result in death or serious damage to other equipment and/or
injury. environmental pollution. Usually an
instruction will be given, together with
a brief explanation.
WARNING indicates a potentially NOTE is used to highlight additional

hazardous situation which, if not information which may be helpful to
avoided, could result in death or se- you.
rious injury.
External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product

line, is NOT to be connected inside the micropanel cabinet. Devices such as relays, switches,
transducers and controls may NOT be installed inside the panel. NO external wiring is al-
lowed to be run through the micropanel. All wiring must be in accordance with Johnson
Controls published specifications and must be performed ONLY by qualified Johnson Controls
personnel. Johnson Controls will not be responsible for damages/problems resulting from
improper connections to the controls or application of improper control signals. Failure to
follow this will void the manufacturer’s warranty and cause serious damage to property or
injury to persons.
2 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

In complying with Johnson Controls policy for It is the responsibility of operating/service personnel
continuous product improvement, the information to verify the applicability of these documents to the
contained in this document is subject to change without equipment in question. If there is any question in
notice. While Johnson Controls makes no commitment the mind of operating/service personnel as to the
to update or provide current information automatically applicability of these documents, then prior to working
to the manual owner, that information, if applicable, can on the equipment, they should verify with the owner
be obtained by contacting the nearest Johnson Controls whether the equipment has been modified and if current
Service office. literature is available.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 3
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION & SAFETY.......................................................................13
INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................................13
WARRANTY.................................................................................................................................................13
SAFETY AND QUALITY..............................................................................................................................13
Standards for Safety and Quality........................................................................................................13
Responsibility for Safety.....................................................................................................................14
ABOUT THIS MANUAL...............................................................................................................................14
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT............................................................................................................................14
Suitability for Application....................................................................................................................14
Structural Support................................................................................................................................14
Mechanical Strength ...........................................................................................................................14
General Access.....................................................................................................................................14
Pressure Systems................................................................................................................................15
Electrical................................................................................................................................................15
Rotating Parts.......................................................................................................................................15
Sharp Edges..........................................................................................................................................15
Refrigerants and Oils...........................................................................................................................15
High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning.........................................................................................15
Emergency Shutdown..........................................................................................................................15
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................17

INTRODUCTION..........................................................................................................................................17
GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION...........................................................................................................17
Compressors........................................................................................................................................17
Cooler (Evaporator)..............................................................................................................................17
Condenser.............................................................................................................................................18
HIGH AMBIENT KIT.....................................................................................................................................19
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM INTERFACE.......................................................................................19
POWER PANEL............................................................................................................................................19
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS..................................................................................................................20
Power Options......................................................................................................................................20
Control Options....................................................................................................................................20
Compressor, Piping, Evaporator Options..........................................................................................20
Condenser and Cabinet Options.........................................................................................................21
UNIT COMPONENTS ..................................................................................................................................23
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS ...........................................................................................25
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN).............................................................................................27
BASIC UNIT NOMENCLATURE..................................................................................................................27
PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM......................................................................................34
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE.......................................................................................................35

DELIVERY AND STORAGE.........................................................................................................................35
INSPECTION................................................................................................................................................35
MOVING THE CHILLER...............................................................................................................................35
Lifting Weights......................................................................................................................................35
4 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION............................................................................................................................37
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST.......................................................................................................................37
HANDLING...................................................................................................................................................37
INSPECTION................................................................................................................................................37
LOCATION AND CLEARANCES.................................................................................................................37
Foundation............................................................................................................................................38
Ground Level Locations......................................................................................................................38
Rooftop Locations................................................................................................................................38
Noise Sensitive Locations...................................................................................................................38
SPRING ISOLATORS (OPTIONAL).............................................................................................................38
COMPRESSOR MOUNTING.......................................................................................................................38
REMOTE COOLER OPTION.......................................................................................................................38
CHILLED LIQUID PIPING............................................................................................................................38
PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENT.....................................................................................................................39
DUCT WORK CONNECTION .....................................................................................................................40
General Requirements ........................................................................................................................40
WIRING.........................................................................................................................................................40
Evaporator Pump Start Contacts........................................................................................................40
System Run Contacts..........................................................................................................................40
Alarm Status Contacts.........................................................................................................................41
Remote Start/Stop Contacts................................................................................................................41
Remote Emergency Cutoff..................................................................................................................41
Remote Temp Reset Input...................................................................................................................41
Load Limit Input....................................................................................................................................41
Flow Switch Input.................................................................................................................................41
COMPRESSOR HEATERS..........................................................................................................................41
RELIEF VALVES..........................................................................................................................................41
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT........................................................................................................................41
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER...............................................................................................................42
USER CONTROL WIRING INPUTS.............................................................................................................43
USER CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS.........................................................................................................44
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA......................................................................................................................45

OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH).................................................................................................45
Temperatures and Flows.....................................................................................................................45
Voltage Limitations...............................................................................................................................45
HEAT EXCHANGER FLOW, GPM...............................................................................................................46
Ethylene & Propylene Glycol Correction Factors.............................................................................46
PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)......................................................................................................................47
Standard Efficiency YLAA0285 - YLAA0485......................................................................................47
High Efficiency YLAA0195 - YLAA0515..............................................................................................48
JOHNSON CONTROLS 5
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)


ELECTRICAL INFORMATION.....................................................................................................................49
Electrical Notes.....................................................................................................................................50
Electrical Data.......................................................................................................................................51
Wiring Lugs...........................................................................................................................................52
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND.........................................................................................................53
WIRING DIAGRAMS....................................................................................................................................56
Elementary Wiring Diagrams - YLAA0195..........................................................................................56
Connection Wiring Diagrams - YLAA0195.........................................................................................74
Elementary Wiring Diagrams - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515.....................................................................88
Connection Diagrams - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515................................................................................96
DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH).......................................................................................................................... 111
TECHNICAL DATA – CLEARANCES........................................................................................................120
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS......................................................121
ISOLOATOR DATA.....................................................................................................................................124
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolator Cross-reference.....................................................................124
One Inch Deflection Spring Isolators Installation Instructions......................................................125
Seismic Isolator Cross-reference.....................................................................................................126
Seismic Isolator Installation and Adjustment INSTRUCTIONS......................................................127
Duralene Isolator Cross-reference....................................................................................................128
Installation of Durulene Vibration Isolators INSTRUCTIONS.........................................................129
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING......................................................................................................................131
COMMISSIONING......................................................................................................................................131
PREPARATION – POWER OFF.................................................................................................................131
Inspection ...........................................................................................................................................131
Refrigerant Charge.............................................................................................................................131
Service and Oil Line Valves...............................................................................................................131
Compressor Oil...................................................................................................................................131
Fans ....................................................................................................................................................131
Isolation / Protection..........................................................................................................................131
Control Panel......................................................................................................................................131
Power Connections............................................................................................................................131
Grounding...........................................................................................................................................131
Supply Voltage....................................................................................................................................132
PREPARATION – POWER ON..................................................................................................................132
Switch Settings...................................................................................................................................132
Compressor Heaters..........................................................................................................................132
Water System......................................................................................................................................132
Flow Switch.........................................................................................................................................132
Temperature Sensor(s)......................................................................................................................132
EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP & STARTUP CHECKLIST..........................................................................133
PRE-STARTUP....................................................................................................................................133
STARTUP.............................................................................................................................................133
SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST..........................................................................................................................134
6 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)


CHECKING SUPERHEAT AND SUBCOOLING........................................................................................135
LEAK CHECKING......................................................................................................................................135
UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE................................................................................................................136
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS......................................................................................................................137

INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................137
IPU II and I/O Boards..........................................................................................................................137
Display.................................................................................................................................................138
Keypad.................................................................................................................................................138
Battery Back-up..................................................................................................................................138
Transformer ........................................................................................................................................138
Programming # of Compressors.......................................................................................................138
“STATUS” KEY..........................................................................................................................................139
Unit Status...........................................................................................................................................139
General Status Messages..................................................................................................................139
Fault Safety Status Messages...........................................................................................................141
Status Key Messages.........................................................................................................................144
DISPLAY/PRINT KEYS..............................................................................................................................145
Oper Data Key.....................................................................................................................................145
Oper Data Quick Reference List........................................................................................................148
Print Key..............................................................................................................................................149
Operating Data Printout.....................................................................................................................149
History Printout..................................................................................................................................150
History Displays.................................................................................................................................150
Software Version................................................................................................................................152
“ENTRY” KEYS..........................................................................................................................................153
Up and Down Arrow Keys..................................................................................................................153
Enter/ADV Key....................................................................................................................................153
“SETPOINTS” KEYS.................................................................................................................................154
Cooling Setpoints...............................................................................................................................154
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control.........................................................................................................154
Return Chilled Liquid Control...........................................................................................................155
Remote Setpoints Control.................................................................................................................155
SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY KEY.............................................................................................................155
PROGRAM KEY.........................................................................................................................................157
System Trip Volts................................................................................................................................158
Unit Trip Volts.....................................................................................................................................159
PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT..................................................................................................159
SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST...................................................................................................160
“UNIT” KEYS ............................................................................................................................................161
Options Key........................................................................................................................................161
CLOCK.......................................................................................................................................................165
UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST......................................................166
JOHNSON CONTROLS 7
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)


SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION.....................................................................................................................167
CAPACITY CONTROL...............................................................................................................................167
SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS...............................................................................................167
DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS..........................................................................................167
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL....................................................................................................167
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING......................168
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROLOVERRIDE TO REDUCE CYCLING..........................................168
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL.....................................................................................................169
RETURN CHILLLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING.....................170
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER.............................................................................................................................171
ANTI-COINCIDENCE TIMER.....................................................................................................................171
EVAPORATOR PUMP CONTROL & YORK..............................................................................................171
HYDRO KIT PUMP CONTROL..................................................................................................................171
EVAPORATOR HEATER CONTROL.........................................................................................................171
PUMPDOWN CONTROL...........................................................................................................................171
STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL.............................................................................................171
LOAD LIMITING.........................................................................................................................................175
COMPRESSOR RUN STATUS..................................................................................................................175
ALARM STATUS........................................................................................................................................175
BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET USINGA VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL..................................176
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................177

CLEARING HISTORY BUFFERS..............................................................................................................177
SERVICE MODE........................................................................................................................................177
SERVICE MODE – OUTPUTS...................................................................................................................177
SERVICE MODE – CHILLER CONFIGURATION......................................................................................178
SERVICE MODE – ANALOG & DIGITAL INPUTS....................................................................................178
CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS..................................................................................................................179
MICROBOARD LAYOUT...........................................................................................................................180
CHECKING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS........................................................................................................181
Digital Inputs.......................................................................................................................................181
Analog Inputs – Temperature............................................................................................................181
Outside Air Sensor.............................................................................................................................181
Liquid & Refrigerant Sensor Test Points .........................................................................................182
Analog Inputs – Pressure..................................................................................................................183
Digital Outputs....................................................................................................................................184
OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLATION......................................................................................................185
Parts.....................................................................................................................................................185
Assembly and Wiring.........................................................................................................................185
Obtaining a Printout...........................................................................................................................185
TROUBLESHOOTING...............................................................................................................................186
8 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)


SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE.......................................................................................................................189
IMPORTANT...............................................................................................................................................189
COMPRESSORS........................................................................................................................................189
Oil Level check...................................................................................................................................189
Oil Analysis.........................................................................................................................................189
CONDENSER FAN MOTORS....................................................................................................................189
CONDENSER COILS.................................................................................................................................189
OPERATING PARAMETERS.....................................................................................................................189
ON-BOARD BATTERY BACK-UP.............................................................................................................189
PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER (EVAPORATOR) HEATER....................................................189
OVERALL UNIT INSPECTION..................................................................................................................189
MICROCHANNEL COIL CLEANING.........................................................................................................190
BACNET, MODBUS AND YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS.................................................................191
BACnet and Modbus Communications............................................................................................194
Communications Data Map Notes:...................................................................................................194
YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS...........................................................................................................198
Received Data (Control Data)............................................................................................................198
Transmitted Data................................................................................................................................198
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION CHART..................................................................................................202
R410APRESSURE TEMPERATURE CHART...........................................................................................203
JOHNSON CONTROLS 9
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

LIST OF FIGURES
FIG. 1 – UNIT COMPONENTS FRONT.....................................................................................................23
FIG. 2 – UNIT COMPONENTS SIDE.........................................................................................................24
FIG. 3 – POWER PANEL COMPONENTS.................................................................................................25
FIG. 4 – POWER PANEL / CONTROL COMPONENTS............................................................................26
FIG. 5 – REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM..............................................................................................33
FIG. 6 – PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM......................................................................34
FIG. 7 – UNIT RIGGING/LIFTING .............................................................................................................36
FIG. 8 – CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM.........................................................................................................39
FIG. 9 – S
INGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED
DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER......................................................................42
FIG. 10 – CONTROL WIRING INPUTS........................................................................................................43
FIG. 11 – CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS....................................................................................................44
FIG. 12 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1..............................................................56
FIG. 21 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1..............................................................74
FIG. 28 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1........................................88
FIG. 32 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1.......................................................96
FIG. 33 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 2.......................................................98
FIG. 34 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 3.....................................................100
FIG. 37 – WIRING DIAGRAM, SINGLE POINT WIRING OPTIONS.........................................................106
FIG. 38 – DUAL PUMP WIRING................................................................................................................107
FIG. 39 – WIRING.......................................................................................................................................108
FIG. 40 – LAYOUT - POWER BLOCKS AND TRANSFORMERS............................................................. 110
FIG. 41 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0195HE.................................................................................. 111
FIG. 42 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0220HE, 0260HE, 0285SE, & 320SE.................................... 112
10 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

LIST OF FIGURES (CONT.)

FIG. 43 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0300HE,YLAA0360SE, YLAA0400SE.................................. 113
FIG. 44 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0435SE (ENGLISH)............................................................... 114
FIG. 45 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0350HE (ENGLISH)............................................................... 115
FIG. 46 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0390HE, YLAA0485SE.......................................................... 116
FIG. 50 – UNIT CLEARANCES – ALL MODELS......................................................................................120
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS......................................121
FIG. 52 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE...................................124
FIG. 53 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS...............125
FIG. 54 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE.............................................................................126
FIG. 55 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS.........................127
FIG. 56 – DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE........................................................................128
FIG. 57 – INSTALLATION OF DURULENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS INSTRUCTIONS.........................129
FIG. 58 – L
EAVING WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL EXAMPLE.....................................................168
FIG. 59 – SETPOINT ADJUST...................................................................................................................168
FIG. 60 – CONDENSER FAN LOCATIONS WIRING DIAGRAMS............................................................172
FIG. 61 – MICROBOARD LAYOUT...........................................................................................................180
FIG. 62 – I/O BOARD RELAY CONTACT ARCHITECTURE.....................................................................184
FIG. 63 – PRINTER TO MICROBOARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS.................................................185
FIG. 64 – MICROPANEL CONNECTIONS.................................................................................................192
JOHNSON CONTROLS 11
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

LIST OF TABLES
TABLE 1 – TEMPERATURES AND FLOWS.............................................................................................45
TABLE 2 – VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS.........................................................................................................45
TABLE 3 – ETHYLENE & PROPYLENE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS........................................46
TABLE 4 – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH).................................................................................................47
TABLE 4A – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH).................................................................................................48
TABLE 5 – MICROPANEL POWER SUPPLY............................................................................................49
TABLE 6 – VOLTAGE RANGE..................................................................................................................49
TABLE 7 – SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST.....................................................................................................134
TABLE 8 – STATUS KEY MESSAGES QUICK REFERENCE LIST.......................................................144
TABLE 9 – OPERATION DATA................................................................................................................148
TABLE 10 – COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAMMABLE LIMITS AND DEFAULTS..............................156
TABLE 11 – PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT..............................................................................159
TABLE 12 – SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST..............................................................................160
TABLE 13 – UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST.................................166
TABLE 14 – SAMPLE COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL...........................169
TABLE 15 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS).....................170
TABLE 16 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS).....................170
TABLE 17 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE
ONLY (2, 3, OR 4 FANS PER SYSTEM)...............................................................................173
TABLE 18 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE
ONLY (5 OR 6 FANS PER SYSTEM)....................................................................................174
TABLE 19 – COMPRESSOR OPERATION – LOAD LIMITING................................................................175
TABLE 20 – I/O DIGITAL INPUTS.............................................................................................................179
TABLE 21 – I/O DIGITAL OUTPUTS.........................................................................................................179
TABLE 22 – I/O ANALOG INPUTS............................................................................................................179
TABLE 23 – I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS........................................................................................................179
TABLE 24 – OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR......................................................................................................181
TABLE 25 – ENTERING/LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID TEMP. SENSOR,
TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE CORRELATION........................................................................182
TABLE 26 – PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS...............................................................................................183
TABLE 27 – TROUBLESHOOTING...........................................................................................................186
TABLE 28 – MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND DEFAULT VALUES..................................................................192
TABLE 29 – VALUES REQUIRED FOR BAS COMMUNICATION............................................................193
TABLE 30 – REAL TIME ERROR NUMBERS...........................................................................................193
TABLE 31 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP..................................................195
TABLE 32 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP....................................................................199
12 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY

INTRODUCTION For warranty purposes, the following conditions must
YORK YLAA0195 - 0515 (57 -142 ton, 200 - 500kW) be satisfied: 1
chillers are manufactured to the highest design and • The initial start of the unit must be carried out by
construction standards to ensure high performance, trained personnel from an Authorized Johnson
reliability and adaptability to all types of air conditioning Controls Service Center (see “Commissioning”
installations. section of this IOM).
• Only genuine YORK approved spare parts, oils,
The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solutions coolants, and refrigerants must be used.
and is not suitable for purposes other than those specified
• All the scheduled maintenance operations detailed
in this manual.
in this manual must be performed at the specified
times by suitably trained and qualified personnel
This manual contains all the information required for
(see “Maintenance Section” of this IOM.
correct installation and commissioning of the unit,
together with operating and maintenance instructions. • Failure to satisfy any of these conditions will
The manual should be read thoroughly before attempting automatically void the warranty.
to operate or service the unit. All procedures detailed in
the manuals, including installation, commissioning and SAFETY AND QUALITY
maintenance tasks must only be performed by suitably Standards for Safety and Quality
trained and qualified personnel. YLAA chillers are designed and built within an ISO
9002 accredited design and manufacturing organization.
The manufacturer will not be liable for any injury or The chillers comply with the applicable sections of the
damage caused by incorrect installation, commissioning, following Standards and Codes:
operation or maintenance resulting from a failure to
• ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15- Safety Code for
follow the procedures and instructions detailed in the
Mechanical Refrigeration.
manuals.
• ANSI/NFPA Standard 70- National Electrical
WARRANTY Code (N.E.C.).
Johnson Controls warrants all equipment and materials • ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code- Section
against defects in workmanship and materials for a VIII Division 1.
period of eighteen months from date of shipment, or • ARI Standard 550/590 - Positive Displacement
12 months from date of start-up, whichever occurs first, Compressors and Air Cooled Rotary Screw Water
unless labor or extended warranty has been purchased Chilling Packages.
as part of the contract. • ASHRAE 90.1- Energy Efficiency compliance.
• Conform to Intertek Testing Services, formerly
The warranty is limited to parts only replacement and ETL, for construction of chillers and provide
shipping of any faulty part, or sub-assembly, which has ETL/cETL listing label.
failed due to poor quality or manufacturing errors. All
claims must be supported by evidence that the failure • Manufactured in facility registered to ISO
has occurred within the warranty period, and that the 9002.
unit has been operated within the designed parameters • OSHA – Occupational Safety and Health Act.
specified.
In addition, the chillers conform to Underwriters
All warranty claims must specify the unit model, serial Laboratories (U.L.) for construction of chillers and
number, order number and run hours/starts. Model provide U.L./cU.L. Listing Label.
and serial number information is printed on the unit
identification plate.
The unit warranty will be void if any modification to the

unit is carried out without prior written approval from
Johnson Controls.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 13
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION and SAFETY
Responsibility for Safety The contents of this manual include suggested best
Every care has been taken in the design and manufacture working practices and procedures. These are issued for
of the unit to ensure compliance with the safety guidance only, and they do not take precedence over
requirements listed above. However, the individual the above stated individual responsibility and/or local
operating or working on any machinery is primarily safety regulations.
responsible for:
This manual and any other document supplied with the
• Personal safety, safety of other personnel, and the unit are the property of Johnson Controls which reserves
machinery. all rights. They may not be reproduced, in whole or
in part, without prior written authorization from an
• Correct utilization of the machinery in accordance authorized Johnson Controls representative.
with the procedures detailed in the manuals.
MISUSE OF EQUIPMENT
ABOUT THIS MANUAL Suitability for Application
The following terms are used in this document to alert The unit is intended for cooling water or glycol solutions
the reader to areas of potential hazard. and is not suitable for purposes other than those specified
in these instructions. Any use of the equipment other
than its intended use, or operation of the equipment
contrary to the relevant procedures may result in injury
to the operator or damage to the equipment.
The unit must not be operated outside the design

parameters specified in this manual.
A WARNING is given in this document to identify a
hazard, which could lead to personal injury. Usually Structural Support
an instruction will be given, together with a brief
Structural support of the unit must be provided as
explanation and the possible result of ignoring the
indicated in these instructions. Failure to provide proper
instruction.
support may result in injury to the operator or damage
to the equipment and/or building.
Mechanical Strength
The unit is not designed to withstand loads or stresses
from adjacent equipment, pipework or structures.
Additional components must not be mounted on the unit.
A CAUTION identifies a hazard which could lead to Any such extraneous loads may cause structural failure
damage to the machine, damage to other equipment and may result in injury to the operator or damage to
and/or environmental pollution. Usually an instruction the equipment.
will be given, together with a brief explanation and the
possible result of ignoring the instruction. General Access
There are a number of areas and features, which may
be a hazard and potentially cause injury when working
on the unit unless suitable safety precautions are taken.
It is important to ensure access to the unit is restricted
to suitably qualified persons who are familiar with the
potential hazards and precautions necessary for safe
operation and maintenance of equipment containing
A NOTE is used to highlight additional information, high temperatures, pressures and voltages.
which may be helpful to you but where there are no
special safety implications.
14 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Pressure Systems Sharp Edges

The unit contains refrigerant vapor and liquid under The fins on the air-cooled condenser coils have sharp
pressure, release of which can be a danger and cause metal edges. Reasonable care should be taken when
injury. The user should ensure that care is taken during working in contact with the coils to avoid the risk of
1
installation, operation and maintenance to avoid damage minor abrasions and lacerations. The use of gloves is
to the pressure system. No attempt should be made recommended.
to gain access to the component parts of the pressure
system other than by suitably trained and qualified Frame rails, brakes, and other components may also have
personnel. sharp edges. Reasonable care should be taken when
working in contact with any components to avoid risk
Electrical of minor abrasions and lacerations.
The unit must be grounded. No installation or
Refrigerants and Oils
maintenance work should be attempted on the electrical
equipment without first switching power OFF, isolating Refrigerants and oils used in the unit are generally
and locking-off the power supply. Servicing and nontoxic, non-flammable and non-corrosive, and pose
maintenance on live equipment must only be performed no special safety hazards. Use of gloves and safety
by suitably trained and qualified personnel. No attempt glasses is, however, recommended when working on the
should be made to gain access to the control panel or unit. The build up of refrigerant vapor, from a leak for
electrical enclosures during normal operation of the example, does pose a risk of asphyxiation in confined or
unit. enclosed spaces and attention should be given to good
ventilation.
Rotating Parts
High Temperature and Pressure Cleaning
Fan guards must be fitted at all times and not removed
unless the power supply has been isolated. If ductwork is High temperature and pressure cleaning methods (e.g.
to be fitted, requiring the wire fan guards to be removed, steam cleaning) should not be used on any part of the
alternative safety measures must be taken to protect pressure system as this may cause operation of the
against the risk of injury from rotating fans. pressure relief device(s). Detergents and solvents, which
may cause corrosion, should also be avoided.
Emergency Shutdown
In case of emergency, the control panel is fitted with
a Unit Switch to stop the unit in an emergency. When
operated, it removes the low voltage 120 VAC electrical
supply from the inverter system, thus shutting down
the unit.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 15
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
16 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
INTRODUCTION GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

YORK YLAA Air-Cooled Scroll Chillers provide Compressors
chilled water for all air conditioning applications using The chiller has suction-gas cooled, hermetic, scroll
central station air handling or terminal units. They are compressors. The YLAA compressors incorporate
completely self-contained and are designed for outdoor a compliant scroll design in both the axial and
(roof or ground level) installation. Each complete radial direction. All rotating parts are statically and
packaged unit includes hermetic scroll compressors, dynamically balanced. A large internal volume and oil
a liquid cooler, air cooled condenser, a charge of Zero reservoir provides greater liquid tolerance. Compressor
Ozone Depletion Potential Refrigerant R-410A and crankcase heaters are also included for extra protection
a weather resistant microprocessor control center, all against liquid migration. The motor terminal boxes have
mounted on a pressed steel base. IP54 weather protection.
The units are completely assembled with all Cooler (Evaporator)
interconnecting refrigerant piping and internal wiring,
ready for field installation. The cooler is a direct expansion type with refrigerant
inside high efficiency copper tubes. The liquid flowing
Prior to delivery, the packaged unit is pressure-tested, through the cooler is forced over the tubes by water
evacuated, and fully charged with a zero ozone depletion baffles.
Refrigerant-R410A and oil. After assembly, a complete
operational test is performed with water flowing through The water baffles are constructed of brass to resist
the cooler to assure that the refrigeration circuit operates corrosion. The removable heads allow access to the
correctly. internally enhanced seamless copper tubes. Vent and
drain connections are included.
The unit structure is heavy-gauge, galvanized steel. This
galvanized steel is coated with baked-on powder paint, Water inlet and outlet connections are grooved for
which, when subjected to ASTM B117 1000 hour, salt compatibility with field supplied ANSI/AWWA C-606
spray testing, yields a minimum ASTM 1654 rating of couplings.
“6”. Units are designed in accordance with NFPA 70
(National Electric Code), ASHRAE/ANSI 15 Safety The cooler is equipped with a heater controlled by
code for mechanical refrigeration, ASME, and rated in a separate thermostat. The heater provides freeze
accordance with ARI Standard 550/590. protection for the cooler down to -29º C (-20º F) ambient.
The cooler is covered with ¾" flexible, closed cell, foam
insulation (K = 0.25).
JOHNSON CONTROLS 17
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
The evaporator is constructed, tested and stamped in DISPLAY/PRINT of typical information:

accordance with applicable sections of ASME pressure • Chilled liquid temperatures
vessel code for minimum 31.0 barg (450 psig) refrigerant
• Ambient temperature
side design working pressure and 10.3 barg (150 psig)
water side design working pressure. • System pressures (each circuit)
• Operating hours and starts (each compressor)
A strainer with a mesh size between .5 and 1.5 mm (40 • Print calls up to the liquid crystal display
mesh) is recommended upstream of the heat exchanger • Operating data for the systems
to prevent clogging from water system debris.
• History of fault shutdown data for up to the last
Condenser six fault shutdown conditions.
• An RS-232 port, in conjunction with this press-to-
Coils – Condenser coils are Microchannel type and
print button, is provided to permit the capability
made of a single material to avoid galvanic corrosion
of hard copy print-outs via a separate printer (by
due to dissimilar metals. Coils and headers are brazed as
others).
one piece. Integral subcooling is included. The design
working pressure of the coil is 100 barg (1500 psig).
ENTRY section to:
Fans – The condenser fans are composed of corrosion ENTER setpoints or modify system values.
resistant aluminum hub and glass-fiber reinforced
polypropylene composite blades molded into a low
noise airfoil section. They are designed for maximum SETPOINTS updating can be performed to:
efficiency and are statically and dynamically balanced • Chilled liquid temperature setpoint and range
for vibration free operation. They are directly driven • Remote reset temperature range
by independent motors and positioned for vertical air • Set daily schedule/holiday for start/stop
discharge. The fan guards are constructed of heavy
• Manual override for servicing
gauge, rust resistant, coated steel.
• Low and high ambient cutouts
Motors – The IP54 fan motors are Totally Enclosed Air- • Number of compressors
Over, squirrel cage type, current protected. They feature • Low liquid temperature cutout
ball bearings that are double sealed and permanently • Low suction pressure cutout
lubricated.
• High discharge pressure cutout
Ambient Kit (High) – Required if units are to operate • Anti-recycle timer (compressor start cycle
when the ambient temperature is above 46°C (115°F). time)
Includes discharge pressure transducers. • Anti-coincident timer (delay compressor starts)
All controls are contained in a NEMA 3R/12 cabinet UNIT section to:
with hinged outer door and include Liquid Crystal
• Set time
Display with Light Emitting Diode backlighting for
outdoor viewing: • Set unit options
• Two display lines
• Twenty characters per line
A color coded 12-button non-tactile keypad provides

user access to:
18 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
UNIT ON/OFF switch
The microprocessor control center is capable of The operating program is stored in non-volatile memory
displaying the following: (EPROM) to eliminate chiller failure due to AC powered
failure/battery discharge. Programmed setpoints are
retained in lithium battery-backed RTC memory for 5
• Return and leaving liquid temperature
years minimum.
2
• Low leaving liquid temperature cutout setting
• Low ambient temperature cutout setting HIGH AMBIENT KIT
• Outdoor air temperature Allows units to operate when the ambient temperature
• English or Metric data is above 46°C (115°F). Includes discharge pressure
• Suction pressure cutout setting transducers.
• Each system suction pressure
BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM
• Discharge pressure (optional) INTERFACE
• Liquid Temperature Reset via a Johnson Controls
ISN DDC or Building Automation System (by The Microprocessor Board can accept a 4-20 milliamp,
others) via a pulse width modulated (PWM) input 0-10VDC input to reset the leaving chiller liquid
as standard. temperature from a Building Automation System.
• Anti-recycle timer status for each system • The standard unit capabilities include remote
• Anti-coincident system start timer condition start-stop, remote water temperature reset via up
• Compressor run status to two stages of demand (load) limiting depending
on model.
• No cooling load condition
• The standard control panel can be directly con-
• Day, date and time
nected to a Johnson Controls Building Automated
• Daily start/stop times System via the standard on-board RS232 com-
• Holiday status munication port.
• Automatic or manual system lead/lag control
• Lead system definition POWER PANEL
• Compressor starts & operating hours Each panel contains:
(each compressor) • Compressor power terminals
• Status of hot gas valves, evaporator heater • Compressor motor starting contactors per
I.E.C.**
and fan operation
• Control power terminals to accept incoming for
• Run permissive status
115-1-60 control power
• Number of compressors running
• Fan contactors & overload current protection
• Liquid solenoid valve status
• Load & unload timer status The power wiring is routed through liquid-tight conduit
• Water pump status to the compressors and fans.
Provisions are included for pumpdown at shutdown;

optional remote chilled water temperature reset, and two
steps of demand load limiting from an external building
automation system. Unit alarm contacts are standard.
* Intensity of Protection European Standard

** International Electrotechnical Commission
JOHNSON CONTROLS 19
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS
POWER OPTIONS POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

Will correct unit compressor power factors to a 0.90-
0.95. (Factory-mounted)
COMPRESSOR POWER CONNECTIONS
Single-point terminal block connection(s) are provided CONTROL OPTIONS
as standard. The following power connections are avail-
able as options. (See electrical data for specific voltage
and options availability.) (Factory-mounted) AMBIENT KIT (LOW)
Units will operate to -1°C (30.0°F). This accessory in-
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY TERMINAL BLOCK cludes all necessary components to permit chiller opera-
Includes enclosure, terminal-block and intercon- tion to -18°C (0°F). (This option includes the Discharge
necting wiring to the compressors. Separate external Pressure Transducer / Readout Capability option.) For
protection must be supplied, by others, in the incom- proper head pressure control in applications below -1°C
ing compressor-power wiring. (Do not include this (30°F) where wind gusts may exceed 8 kph (5 mph),
option if either the Single-Point Non-Fused Discon- it is recommended that Optional Condenser Louvered
nect Switch or Single-Point Circuit Breaker options Enclosure Panels also be included. (Factory-mounted)
have been included.)
AMBIENT KIT (HIGH)
SINGLE-POINT NON-FUSED DISCONNECT Required if units are to operate when the ambient
SWITCH temperature is above 46°C (115°F). Includes discharge
Unit-mounted disconnect switch (es) with external, pressure transducers
lockable handle (in compliance with Article 440-14
of N.E.C.), can be supplied to isolate the unit power LANGUAGE LCD AND KEYPAD DISPLAY
voltage for servicing. Separate external fusing must Spanish, French, German, and Italian unit LCD con-
be supplied, by others in the power wiring, which trols and keypad display available. Standard language
must comply with the National Electrical Code and/ is English.
or local codes.
COMPRESSOR, PIPING, EVAPORATOR
SINGLE-POINT NON-FUSED DISCONNECT OPTIONS
SWITCH WITH INDIVIDUAL SYSTEM
BREAKERS
LOW TEMPERATURE BRINE
Includes unit-mounted disconnect switch with ex-
Required for brine chilling below -1°C (30°F) leaving
ternal, lockable handles (in compliance with Article
brine temperature. Option includes resized thermal
440-14 of N.E.C.) to isolate unit power voltage for
expansion valve. (Factory-mounted)
servicing. Factory interconnecting wiring is provided
from the disconnect switch to factory supplied system
CHICAGO CODE RELIEF VALVES
circuit breakers.
Unit will be provided with relief valves to meet Chicago
code requirements. (Factory-mounted)
SINGLE-POINT CIRCUIT BREAKER
A unit mounted circuit breaker with external, lock-
SERVICE ISOLATION VALVE
able handle (in compliance with N.E.C. Article
Service suction and discharge (ball type) isolation valves
440-14); can be supplied to isolate the power voltage
are added to unit per system (discharge service ball-type
for servicing. (This option includes the Single-Point
isolation valve is standard on each circuit).
Power connection.)
CONTROL TRANSFORMER
Converts unit power voltage to 115-1-60 (0.5 or 1.0
KVA capacity). Factory mounting includes primary
and secondary wiring between the transformer and the
control panel. (Factory-mounted)
20 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
HOT GAS BY-PASS HYDRO-KIT

Permits continuous, stable operation at capacities below Factory installed Hydro-Kit suitable for water glycol
the minimum step of compressor unloading to as low systems with up to 35% glycol at leaving temperatures
as 5% capacity (depending on both the unit and operat- down to 20° F. The Hydro-kit option is available in a 2
ing conditions) by introducing an artificial load on the single or dual configuration (dual as standby duty only),
cooler. Hot gas by-pass is installed on only refrigerant with totally enclosed permanently lubricated pump
system #1 on two-circuited units. (Factory- mounted) motors.
DX COOLER 300 (21 BAR) PSIG DWP WATERSIDE The hydro-kit option comes standard with a balanc-
The waterside will be of 300 PSIG (21 bar) instead of the ing valve, flow switch, pressure ports, suction guide,
standard 150 PSIG DWP. 300 PSIG R.F. flanges are in- strainer, bleed and drain valves and frost protection.
cluded on the DX cooler nozzles. (Factory-mounted) The
companion flanges will be field-supplied by others. Expansion tanks are optional within the Hydro-Kit
option.
FLANGES (ANSI/AWWA C-606 COUPLINGS
TYPE) CONDENSER AND CABINET OPTIONS
Consists of (2) flange adapters for grooved end pipe
Condenser coil protection against corrosive environ-
(standard 10.5 bar [150 psi] cooler). (Not available on
ments is available by choosing any of the following
optional DX cooler 21 bar (300 psi) DWP waterside.)
options. For additional application recommendations,
(Field-mounted)
refer to FORM 150.1 -ES1. (Factory-mounted)
FLOW SWITCH
POST-COATED DIPPED CONDENSER
The flow switch or its equivalent must be furnished
COILS
with each unit.
The unit is built with dipped-cured condenser coils.
This is the choice for corrosive applications (with
150 PSIG (10.5 BAR) DWP
the exception of strong alkalis, oxidizers and wet
For standard units. Johnson Controls model F61MG-
bromine, chlorine and fluorine in concentrations
1C Vapor-proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch (10.5 bar
greater than 100 ppm).
[150 psig] DWP), -29°C to 121°C (-20°F to 250°F),
with 1" NPT connection for upright mounting in
ENCLOSURE PANELS (UNIT)
horizontal pipe. (Field-mounted)
Tamperproof Enclosure Panels prevent unauthorized
access to units. Enclosure Panels can provide an
FLOW SWITCH ACCESSORY
aesthetically pleasing alternative to expensive fenc-
Vapor proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch, 10.3 barg (150
ing. Additionally, for proper head pressure control,
psig) DWP, -7°C to 121°C (20°F to 250°F) with 1" NPT
Johnson Controls recommends the use of Condenser
(IPS) connection for upright mounting in horizontal pipe
Louvered Panels for winter applications where wind
(this flow switch or equivalent must be furnished with
gusts may exceed five miles per hour. The following
each unit). (Field-mounted)
types of enclosure panels are available:
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
WIRE PANELS (FULL UNIT)
Alternative to an above mentioned flow switch. Vapor
Consists of welded wire-mesh guards mounted
proof SPDT, NEMA 3R switch, 10.3 barg (150 psig)
on the exterior of the unit. Prevents unauthor-
DWP, -7°C to 121°C (20°F to 250°F) with 1" NPT
ized access, yet provides free air flow. (Factory-
(IPS) connection for upright mounting in horizontal
mounted)
pipe (This flow switch or equivalent must be furnished
with each unit).
WIRE/LOUVERED PANELS
Consists of welded wiremesh panels on the bottom
part of unit and louvered panels on the condenser
section of the unit. (Factory- mounted).
JOHNSON CONTROLS 21
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LOUVERED PANELS (CONDENSER COIL SOUND ATTENUATION

ONLY) One or both of the following sound attenuation options
Louvered panels are mounted on the sides and ends are recommended for residential or other similar sound
of the condenser coils for protection. (Factory- sensitive locations:
mounted)
COMPRESSOR ACOUSTIC SOUND BLANKET
LOUVERED PANELS (FULL UNIT) Each compressor is individually enclosed by an
Louvered panels surround the front, back, and acoustic sound blanket. The sound blankets are made
sides of the unit. They prevent unauthorized access with one layer of acoustical absorbent textile fiber of
and visually screen unit components. Unrestricted 15mm (5/8") thickness; one layer of anti-vibrating
air flow is permitted through generously sized heavy material thickness of 3 mm (1/8"). Both are
louvered openings. This option is applicable for closed by two sheets of welded PVC, reinforced for
any outdoor design ambient temperature up to 46° temperature and UV resistance. (Factory-mounted)
(115°F). (Factory-mounted)
ULTRA QUIET FANS
COIL END HAIL GUARD Lower RPM, 8-pole fan motors are used with steeper-
Louvered panel attached to exposed coil end. pitch fans. (Factory-mounted)
(Factory-mounted)
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
Level adjusting, spring type 25.4mm (1") or seismic
deflection or neoprene pad isolators for mounting under
unit base rails. (Field-mounted)
22 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
UNIT COMPONENTS
FAN DECK
POWER
PANEL
CONTROL
PANEL
MICROCHANNEL
COILS
LIQUID
TIGHT
CONDUIT
COMPRESSORS
FILTER
DRIERS
FORMED
BASE
RAIL
SIGHT
GLASS
TXV
VALVES
EVAPORATOR
LD14317
FIG. 1 – UNIT COMPONENTS FRONT
JOHNSON CONTROLS 23
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
UNIT COMPONENTS (CONT)
FAN ASSEMBLIES
CONDENSER
CONDENSER COILS
COILS
EVAPORATOR
RECEIVERS LD13426
FIG. 2 – UNIT COMPONENTS SIDE
24 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS
2
DISCONNECT
SWITCH
FAN FUSES FAN CONTACTORS
FAN CONTACTOR
COMPRESSOR
OVERLOADS
XTBF1
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTORS
LD13247
FIG. 3 – POWER PANEL COMPONENTS
JOHNSON CONTROLS 25
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS (CONT)
FAN FUSES MICROCOMPUTER

FAN CONTACTORS CONTROL CONTROL
RELAY CENTER MICROPANEL
DISPLAY
KEYPAD
COMPRESSOR
OVERLOADS
XTBC1
MICROBOARD
XTBC2
COMPRESSOR
CONTACTORS XTBF2 LD13248
FIG. 4 – POWER PANEL / CONTROL COMPONENTS
26 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)
BASIC UNIT NOMENCLATURE
YLAA0360SE 50XCA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2
BASE PRODUCT TYPE NOMINAL UNIT REFRIGERANT VOLTAGES STARTER DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT

CAPACITY DESIGNATOR LEVEL
Y = YORK
L = Scroll
A = Air Cooled A = Development Level
Condensing Unit C = Design Series A, B, C
A = Americas X = Across the Line
E = Europe 50 = 380/415-3-50
Four Digit Unit Number E = R-410A
S = Standard Efficiency
H = High Efficiency
Z = Standard Efficiency (round tube)
Y = High Efficiency (round tube)
FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

CONTRACT CONTRACT NUMBER NUM CONTRACT NUMBER = {CONTRACT/NUM}
ORDER ORDER QUANTITY QTY ORDER QUANTITY = { ORDER/QTY }
N USA ORIGIN NOT REQUIRED
USA USA ORIGIN
Y USA ORIGIN REQUIRED
LBS CRANE/RIGGING SHIPPING WEIGHT = {LBS}
SHIPWT SHIPPING WEIGHT
KG CRANE/RIGGING SHIPPING WEIGHT = {KG}
N UNIT BEING BUILT FOR SOLD ORDER
STOCK STOCK UNIT
Y UNIT BEING BUILT FOR STOCK
N NOT A CONVERSION
CONV STOCK CONVERSION
C ORDER BEING CONVERTED FROM STOCK
YLAA YLAA
0195 0195
0220 0220
0260 0260
0285 0285
0300 0300
0320 0320
0350 0350
MODEL MODEL (PIN 1-4)
0360 0360
0390 0390
0400 0400
0435 0435
0440 0440
0455 0455
0485 0485
0515 0515
S STANDARD EFFICIENCY
H HIGH EFFICIENCY
UNIT UNIT DESIGNATOR (PIN 9)
Y HIGH EFFICIENCY (ROUND TUBE)
Z STANDARD EFFICIENCY (ROUND TUBE)
REF REFRIGERANT (PIN 10) E R-410A
JOHNSON CONTROLS 27
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)

VOLTS VOLTAGE (PIN 11 & 12) 50 380-415/3/50
X ACROSS THE LINE STARTER
STARTER STARTER (PIN 13)
T SOFT START
A DESIGN SERIES A (MICROCHANNEL)
DESIGN DESIGN SERIES (PIN 14) B DESIGN SERIES B (TUBE AND FIN)
C DESIGN SERIES C (MICROCHANNEL CE/ETL PANEL)
DEV DEVELOPMENT LEVEL (PIN 15) A DEVELOPMENT LEVEL A
XX MP SUPPLY TB
SX SP SUPPLY TB
SD SP NF DISCONNECT SWITCH
POWER POWER FIELD (PIN 16 & 17) BX SP CIRCUIT BREAKER W/ LOCKABLE HANDLE
DB SP NF DISC SWITCH W/IND SYS CB
MB MP SUPPLY W/IND SYS CB & L EXT HANDLES
MD MP NF DISC SWITCHES
X NO CONTROL TRANSFORMER REQUIRED
TRANS CNTRL TRANSFORMER (PIN 18) T CONTROL TRANSFORMER REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL CONTROL TRANSFORMER REQUIRED
X NO POWER CAPACITOR REQUIRED
PFC POWER FACTOR CAPACITOR (19) C POWER CAPACITOR REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL POWER CAPACITOR REQUIRED
H HIGH AMBIENT KIT STANDARD (FACTORY)
AMB AMBIENT KITS (PIN 20) A BOTH LOW/HIGH AMBIENT KIT REQUIRED (FACTORY)
Q SPECIAL AMBIENT KIT REQUIRED
T BAS RESET/OFFSET REQUIRED
BAS BAS RESET/OFFSET (PIN 21)
Q SPECIAL BAS RESET/OFFSET REQUIRED
X ENGLISH
S SPANISH
LCD LANGUAGE (PIN 22) F FRENCH
G GERMAN
I ITALIAN
BOTH DISCHARGE & SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
B
RDOUT READOUT KITS (PIN 23) READOUT REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL PRESSURE READOUT REQUIRED
L N AMERICAN SAFETY CODE (CUL/CETL)
SAFETY SAFETY CODES (PIN 24)
C EUROPEAN SAFTEY CODE ( CE )
X X
SENSOR PIN 25
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
MOTOR CURRENT MODULE C MOTOR CURRENT MODULE
PUMP
(PIN 26) Q SPECIAL QUOTE
REMOTE X NO REMOTE PANEL REQUIRED
REMOTE PANEL (PIN 27)
Q SPECIAL REMOTE PANEL REQUIRED
X NO SEQUENCE KIT REQUIRED
SEQ SEQUENCE KIT (PIN 28)
Q SPECIAL SEQUENCE KIT REQUIRED
28 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

NUM LEAVING WATER TEMP = {TEMP/NUM} DEGREES
TEMP LEAVING WATER TEMP(29,30)
QQ SPECIAL LWT REQUIREMENTS
X NO CHICAGO CODE KIT REQUIRED 2
B BOTH CHICAGO CODE & SERV ISOLATION
C CHICAGO CODE KIT REQUIRED
BOTH SUCTION SERVICE VALVE AND DUAL RELIEF VALVE
G
CHICAGO CHICAGO CODE KIT (PIN 31) (EUROPE ONLY)
DUAL RELIEF VALVES NO SUCTION SERVICE VALVE
R
(EUROPE ONLY)
S SERVICE ISOLATION VALVES
Q SPECIAL CHICAGO CODE KIT REQUIRED
X STANDARD VALVES REQ’D
VALVES VALVES (PIN 32)
Q SPECIAL OPTIONAL VALVES REQ’D
X NO HOT GAS BYPASS REQUIRED
HGBP HOT GAS BYPASS (PIN 33) 1 HOT GAS BYPASS REQUIRED - 1 CIRCUIT
Q SPECIAL HOT GAS BYPASS REQUIRED
X X
GAUGE PIN 34
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
X X
OVERLOAD PIN 35
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
X X
PIN36 PIN 36
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
H CRANKCASE HEATER STANDARD
HTR CRANKCASE HEATER (PIN 37)
Q SPECIAL CRANKCASE HEATER REQUIRED
X 150PSIG DWP WATERSIDE
DWP DWP (PIN 38)
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
X STANDARD INSULATION
INS INSULATION (PIN 39) D DOUBLE THICK INSULATION
Q SPECIAL INSULATION REQUIRED
X NO FLANGES REQUIRED
FLANGES FLANGES (PIN 40) V VICTAULIC FLANGES REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL FLANGES REQUIRED
X NO FLOW SWITCH REQUIRED
S ONE FLOW SWITCH REQUIRED
T TWO FLOW SWITCHES REQUIRED
U THREE FLOW SWITCHES REQUIRED
FLOW FLOW SWITCH (PIN 41)
D ONE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH REQUIRED
E TWO DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES REQUIRED
F THREE DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCHES REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL FLOW SWITCH REQUIRED
A ASME PRESSURE VESSEL CODES
VESSEL VESSEL CODES (PIN 42) E PED PRESSURE VESSEL CODES
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
JOHNSON CONTROLS 29
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

X STANDARD COOLER REQUIRED
CLR
COOLER (PIN 43) R REMOTE COOLER REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL COOLER REQUIRED
X X
PIN44 PIN 44
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
X ALUMINUM COILS
C COPPER FIN COILS
COILS COILS (PIN 45) B PRE-COATED FIN COILS
P POST-COATED DIPPED COILS
Q SPECIAL COILS
X NO OPTION REQUIRED
HEAT HEAT RECOVERY (PIN 46) H HEAT RECOVERY
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
X TEAO FAN MOTORS
FANMOTORS FAN MOTORS (PIN 47)
Q SPECIAL FAN MOTORS REQUIRED
X NO ENCLOSURE REQUIRED
1 WIRE (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
2 WIRE (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
3 WIRE/LOUVERED ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
4 WIRE/LOUVERED ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
5 LOUVERED (COND ONLY) ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
6 LOUVERED (COND ONLY) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
7 LOUVERED (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FACTORY)
ENCL ENCLOSURE PANELS (PIN 48) 8 LOUVERED (FULL UNIT) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
END LOUVER (END HAIL GUARD) ENCL PANELS
9
(FACTORY)
A END LOUVER (END HAIL GUARD) ENCL PANELS (FIELD)
B AESTHETIC PANEL KIT ONLY (FACTORY)
C AESTHETIC PANEL KIT ONLY (FIELD)
D AESTHETIC PANEL KIT PLUS HAIL GUARDS (FACTORY)
E AESTHETIC PANEL KIT PLUS HAIL GUARDS (FIELD)
Q SPECIAL ENCLOSURE PANELS
X NO ACOUSTIC BLANKET REQUIRED
B ACOUSTIC BLANKET REQUIRED
ACOUSTIC ACOUSTIC BLANKET (PIN 49)
E ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE
Q SPECIAL ACOUSTIC BLANKET REQUIRED
X NO DOCUMENTS REQUIRED
A BASE, MATERIAL & WITNESS DOCUMENTS
B BASE DOCUMENT
SRDOCS SR DOCUMENTS (PIN 50)
M BASE & MATERIAL DOCUMENTS
W BASE & WITNESS DOCUMENTS
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
30 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

X X
PIN 51 PIN 51
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
X STANDARD LOW SOUND FANS REQUIRED 2
A HIGH AIRFLOW FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
E LOW SOUND FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
L ULTRA QUIET FANS REQUIRED
FANS SOUND FANS (PIN 52)
S HIGH STATIC FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
U ULTRA QUIET FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
2 TWO SPEED FANS REQUIRED (VENDOR SPECIFIC)
Q SPECIAL SOUND FANS REQUIRED
PAINT X X
PIN 53
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
X NO ISOLATORS REQUIRED
1 1" DEFLECTION ISOLATORS REQUIRED
VIBRATION ISOLATORS
ISOL N NEOPRENE ISOLATORS REQUIRED
(PIN 54)
S SEISMIC ISOLATORS REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL ISOLATORS REQUIRED
PIN 55 PIN 55 MARKETING PURPOSES ONLY!
X NO CONTAINERIZATION REQUIRED WITH SHIPPING BAG
A BUY AMERICAN ACT COMPLIANCE WITH SHIPPING BAG
BOTH BUY AMERICAN ACT COMPLIANCE AND CONTAINER
B
SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY PREP)
CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY
C
LOAD)
SHIP SHIP INSTRUCTIONS (PIN 57) NO CONTAINERIZATION REQUIRED WITHOUT SHIPPING
N
BAG
CONTAINER SHIPPED WITHOUT SHIPPING BAG (FACTORY
P
PREP)
BUY AMERICAN ACT COMPLIANCE WITHOUT SHIPPING
U
BAG
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
JOHNSON CONTROLS 31
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

X NO PUMP REQUIRED
A PUMP KIT A REQUIRED
B PUMP KIT B REQUIRED
C PUMP KIT C REQUIRED
D PUMP KIT D REQUIRED
E PUMP KIT E REQUIRED
F PUMP KIT F REQUIRED
G PUMP KIT G REQUIRED
H PUMP KIT H REQUIRED
PKG PUMP PACKAGE (PIN 59) I PUMP KIT I REQUIRED
J PUMP KIT J REQUIRED
K PUMP KIT K REQUIRED
L PUMP KIT L REQUIRED
M PUMP KIT M REQUIRED
N PUMP KIT N REQUIRED
O PUMP KIT O REQUIRED
P PUMP KIT P REQUIRED
R PUMP KIT R REQUIRED
Q SPECIAL QUOTE
PUMP PACKAGE OPTIONS X NO OPTION REQUIRED
PKGOPT
(PIN 60) Q SPECIAL QUOTE
R PLANT OF MANUFACTURE - MONTERREY
MFG PLANT OF MFG (PIN 61)
S PLANT OF MANUFACTURE - SABADELL
CUR CURITIBA, BRAZIL
MEX MEXICO, ES
LOC MFG LOCATION
MTY MONTERREY, BE
SAT SAN ANTONIO, TEXAS
CV YORKWORKS CONFIGURATION VERSION {YW/CV}
YW YORKWORKS VERSION
UV YORKWORKS UPLOAD VERSION {YW/UV}
SQ SPECIAL QUOTE Q SPECIAL QUOTE
32 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
AIR COOLED CONDENSERS
YLAA REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM

(INCLUDING TEMPERATURE SENSORS & PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS)
* HOT GAS OPTION - SYSTEM 1 ONLY
SIGHT GLASS /
MOISTURE INDICATOR
LIQUID LINE FILTER / DRIER
LIQUID LINE
SERVICE VALVE LIQUID LINE
SOLENOID VALVE
HOT DISCHARGE
GAS LINE
OPTIONAL
DISCHARGE LINE
BALL VALVE * SOLENOID OPERATED
HOT GAS BY PASS VALVE
OPTIONAL DISCHARGE TXV

PRESSURE TRANSDUCER
OPTIONAL EQUALIZER
SERVICE VALVE OPTIONAL LINE
SUCTION LINE
HIGH PRESSURE BALL VALVE
CUTOUT SWITCH OPTIONAL
RELIEF VALVE
OPTIONAL
SERVICE
VALVE
DX COOLER
LOW PRESSURE SWITCH OR RETURN WATER

SUCTION PRESSURE TRANSDUCER TEMP. SENSOR
ENTERING CHILLED WATER
LEAVING
LEAVING CHILLED WATER CHILLED WATER
TEMP. SENSOR
OIL EQUALIZING
LINE
2 OR 3 COMPRESSORS PER SYSTEM
LD13138A
FIG. 5 – REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM
JOHNSON CONTROLS 33
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
Control Functions:
DV - Display Value Fans Fans
CHT - Chilled Liquid Temperature Components:
HPC - High Pressure Cutout
LPC - Low Pressure Cutout Pressure Relief Valve
HPL - High Pressure Load Limiting
LTC - Low Temperature Cutout Service (Ball) Valve
Expansion Valve
Condenser S
Solenoid Valve
Sight Glass
Sensor Pressure
or Temperature
DV
585 PSIG HPL P Service (Stop) Access Valve
PS HPC
650 PSIG PS Pressure Switch
Filter Drier
(Removable Core)
See P.R.V.
Options
ZCPR-3 ZCPR-2 ZCPR-1
Chilled
Liquid
450 PSIG
Compressors Evaporator
DV
LPC P Ambient Air Sensor
DV
HTC T
LTC
T
Chilled
Liquid
DV
S
CHT
LTC
-YLLSV
LD13139
Low
Lowpressure
pressureliquid
liquidrefrigerant
refrigerantenters
entersthe
thecooler
coolerand
andisis vapor is fed to the air cooled condenser coil and fans
evaporated and superheated by the heat
evaporated and superheated by the heat energy absorbed energy where the heat is removed. The fully condensed and
absorbed
from from the
the chilled chilled
liquid liquid through
passing passing the
through
coolerthe subcooled liquid passes through the expansion valve
cooler shell. Low pressure vapour enters the
shell. Low pressure vapor enters the compressor where where pressure is reduced and further cooling takes
compressor where pressure and superheat are
pressure and The
increased. superheat are increased.
high pressure Theishigh
vapour fed pressure
to the air place before returning to the cooler.
cooled condenser coil and fans where the heat is
removed. The fully condensed and subcooled liquid
passes through the expansion valve where pressure is
reduced and further cooling takes place before
returning to the cooler.
FIG. 6 – PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM
34 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE

DELIVERY AND STORAGE MOVING THE CHILLER
To ensure consistent quality and maximum reliability, Prior to moving the unit, ensure that the installation site
all units are tested and inspected before leaving the is suitable for installing the unit and is easily capable
factory. Units are shipped completely assembled and of supporting the weight of the unit and all associated
containing refrigerant under pressure. Units are shipped services.
without export crating unless crating has been specified
on the Sales Order. The units are designed to be lifted using cables. A
spreader bar or frame should be used in order to prevent
If the unit is to be put into storage, prior to installation, damage to the unit from the lifting chains. 3
the following precautions should be observed:
Units are provided with lifting eyes in the sides of the
• The chiller must be “blocked” so that the base is base frame, which can be attached to directly using
not permitted to sag or bow. shackles or safety hooks.
The unit must only be lifted by the base

• Ensure that all openings, such as water connec- frame at the points provided. Never
tions, are securely capped. move the unit on rollers, or lift the unit
using a forklift truck.
• Do not store where exposed to ambient air tem-
peratures exceeding 110 °F (43 °C).
Care should be taken to avoid damaging the condenser
• The condensers should be covered to protect cooling fins when moving the unit.
the fins from potential damage and corrosion,
Lifting Weights
particularly where building work is in progress.
For details of weights and weight distribution, refer to
the data shipped in the chiller information packet and
• The unit should be stored in a location where
unit nameplate.
there is minimal activity in order to limit the risk
of accidental physical damage.
The unit should be lifted by inserting
hooks through the holes provided in
• To prevent inadvertent operation of the pres- unit base rails. Spreader bars should
sure relief devices the unit must not be steam be used to avoid crushing the unit
cleaned.
frame rails with the lifting chains (See
below).
• It is recommended that the unit is periodically
inspected during storage.
INSPECTION
Remove any transit packing and inspect the unit to
ensure that all components have been delivered and that
no damage has occurred during transit. If any damage
is evident, it should be noted on the carrier’s freight bill
and a claim entered in accordance with the instructions
given on the advice note.
Major damage must be reported immediately to your

local Johnson Controls representative.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 35
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE
Typical Lifting Arrangement - 8 Fan Models LD13137
Use spreader bars to avoid lifting chains hitting the

chiller.
Never lift the chiller using a forklift or

by hooking to the top rails. Use only
the lifting holes provided.
Lifting Instructions are placed on a label on the chiller

and on the shipping bag.
LD13140
Typical Lifting Arrangement - 4 Fan Models
FIG. 7 – UNIT RIGGING/LIFTING
36 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 4 – INSTALLATION
To ensure warranty coverage, this INSPECTION
equipment must be commissioned and Immediately upon receiving the unit, it should be
serviced by an authorized Johnson inspected for possible damage which may have
Controls service mechanic or a quali- occurred during transit. If damage is evident, it should
fied service person experienced in be noted in the carrier’s freight bill. A written request
chiller installation. Installation must for inspection by the carrier’s agent should be made at
comply with all applicable codes, par- once. See “Instruction” manual, Form 50.15-NM for
ticularly in regard to electrical wiring more information and details.
and other safety elements such as re-
LOCATION AND CLEARANCES
lief valves, HP cutout settings, design
working pressures, and ventilation re- The YLAA chillers are designed for outdoor installation.
quirements consistent with the amount When selecting a site for installation, be guided by the
and type of refrigerant charge.
following conditions: 4
1. For outdoor locations of the unit, select a place
having an adequate supply of fresh air for the con-
Lethal voltages exist within the control
denser.
panels. Before servicing, open and tag
all disconnect switches. 2. Avoid locations beneath windows or between
structures where normal operating sounds may be
INSTALLATION CHECKLIST objectionable.
The following items, 1 through 5, must be checked 3. Installation sites may be either on a roof, or at
before placing the units in operation. ground level. (See “Foundation” within this section
of the IOM.)
1. Inspect the unit for shipping damage. 4. The condenser fans are the propeller-type, and are
not recommended for use with duct work in the
2. Rig unit using spreader bars.
condenser air stream.
3. Open the unit only to install water piping system.
5. When it is desirable to surround the unit(s), it is
Do not remove protective covers from water con-
recommended that the screening be able to pass
nections until piping is ready for attachment. Check
the required chiller l/s (CFM) without exceeding
water piping to ensure cleanliness.
0.1" of water external static pressure.
4. Pipe unit using good piping practice (see ASHRAE
6. Protection against corrosive environments is avail-
handbook section 215 and 195).
able by supplying the units with either copper fin,
5. Check to see that the unit is installed and operated cured phenolic, or epoxy coating on the condenser
within limitations (Refer to LIMITATIONS). coils. The phenolic or epoxy coils should be offered
with any units being installed at the seashore or
The following pages outline detailed procedures to be where salt spray may hit the unit.
followed to install and start-up the chiller.
In installations where winter operation is intended and
HANDLING snow accumulations are expected, additional height must
These units are shipped as completely assembled units be provided to ensure normal condenser air flow.
containing full operating charge, and care should be
taken to avoid damage due to rough handling. Recommended clearances for units are listed under
“Notes” in the “Dimensions” section of this IOM.
When the available space is less, the unit(s) must be
equipped with the discharge pressure transducer option
to permit high pressure unloading in the event that air
recirculation were to occur.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 37
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Foundation SPRING ISOLATORS (OPTIONAL)

The unit should be mounted on a flat and level When ordered, four (4) isolators will be furnished.
foundation, floor, or rooftop capable of supporting Identify the isolator, locate at the proper mounting point,
the entire operating weight of the equipment. See and adjust per instructions.
PHYSICAL DATA for operating weights. If the unit is
elevated beyond the normal reach of service personnel, COMPRESSOR MOUNTING
a suitable catwalk must be capable of supporting service The compressors are mounted on four (4) rubber
personnel, their equipment, and the compressors. isolators. The mounting bolts should not be loosened
or adjusted at installation of the chiller.
Ground Level Locations
REMOTE COOLER OPTION
It is important that the units be installed on a substantial
base that will not settle. A one piece concrete slab Not available at this time.
with footers extended below the frost line is highly
recommended. Additionally, the slab should not be CHILLED LIQUID PIPING
tied to the main building foundations as noise and General – When the unit(s) has been located in its
vibration may be transmitted. Mounting holes (5/8" final position, the unit water piping may be connected.
dia.) are provided in the steel channel for bolting the Normal installation precautions should be observed in
unit to its foundation (see DIMENSIONS). order to receive maximum operating efficiencies. Piping
should be kept free of all foreign matter. All chilled water
For ground level installations, precautions should be evaporator piping must comply in all respects with local
taken to protect the unit from tampering by or injury to plumbing codes and ordinances.
unauthorized persons. Screws and/or latches on access
panels will prevent casual tampering. However, further Since elbows, tees and valves decrease pump capacity,
safety precautions such as a fenced-in enclosure or all piping should be kept as straight and as simple as
locking devices on the panels may be advisable. possible. All piping must be supported independent
of the chiller.
Rooftop Locations
Choose a spot with adequate structural strength to
Consideration should be given to com-
safely support the entire weight of the unit and service pressor access when laying out water
personnel. Care must be taken not to damage the roof. piping. Routing the water piping too
close to the unit could make compres-
Consult the building contractor or architect if the roof is sor servicing/replacement difficult.
bonded. Roof installations should have wooden beams
(treated to reduce deterioration), cork, rubber, or spring
type vibration isolators under the base to minimize Hand stop valves should be installed in all lines to
vibration. facilitate servicing.
Noise Sensitive Locations Piping to the inlet and outlet connections of the chiller
should include high-pressure rubber hose or piping
Efforts should be made to assure that the chiller is not loops to ensure against transmission of water pump
located next to occupied spaces or noise sensitive areas vibration. The necessary components must be obtained
where chiller noise level would be a problem. Chiller in the field.
noise is a result of compressor and fan operation.
Drain connections should be provided at all low points
to permit complete drainage of the cooler and system
water piping.
38 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
A small valve or valves should be installed at the highest The Flow Switch MUST NOT be used
point or points in the chilled water piping to allow any to start and stop the chiller (i.e. start-
trapped air to be purged. Vent and drain connections ing and stopping the chilled water
should be extended beyond the insulation to make them pump). It is intended only as a safety
accessible. switch.
The piping to and from the cooler must be designed to PIPEWORK ARRANGEMENT
suit the individual installation. It is important that the
The following are suggested pipework arrangements for
following considerations be observed: single unit installations, for multiple unit installations,
each unit should be piped as shown.
1. The chilled liquid piping system should be laid out
so that the circulating pump discharges directly Recommendations of the Building Services
into the cooler. The suction for this pump should Research Association.
be taken from the piping system return line and not
the cooler. This piping scheme is recommended,
but is not mandatory. 4
2. The inlet and outlet cooler connection sizes are
provided in Table 4 (Physical Data).
3. A strainer, preferably 40 mesh, must be installed

in the cooler inlet line just ahead of the cooler. This
is important to protect the cooler from entrance of
large particles which could cause damage to the
evaporator.
4. All chilled liquid piping should be thoroughly LD06596
flushed to free it from foreign material before

the system is placed into operation. Use care not ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY OPEN
to flush any foreign material into or through the
cooler. ISOLATING VALVE - NORMALLY CLOSED
5. As an aid to servicing, thermometers and pressure
gauges should be installed in the inlet and outlet
water lines.
FLOW REGULATING VALVE
6. The chilled water lines that are exposed to outdoor
ambients should be wrapped with supplemental
heater cable and insulated to protect against freeze-
up during low ambient periods, and to prevent FLOW MEASUREMENT DEVICE
formation of condensation on lines in warm humid
locations. As an alternative, ethylene glycol should
be added to protect against freeze-up during low
ambient periods. STRAINER
7. A chilled water flow switch, (either by YORK or

others) MUST be installed in the leaving water
piping of the cooler. There should be a straight PRESSURE TAPPING
horizontal run of at least 5 diameters on each side
of the switch. Adjust the flow switch paddle to the
size of the pipe in which it is to be installed (see
manufacturer’s instructions furnished with the FLOW SWITCH
switch). The switch is to be wired to Terminals
13 – 14 of XTBC1 located in the control panel, as
shown on the unit wiring diagram. FLANGED CONNECTION LD06597
FIG. 8 – CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM
JOHNSON CONTROLS 39
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DUCT WORK CONNECTION Copper power wiring only should be used for supplying
General Requirements power to the chiller. This is recommended to avoid safety
and reliability issues resulting from connection failure at
The following duct work recommendations are intended the power connections to the chiller. Aluminum wiring
to ensure satisfactory operation of the unit. Failure to is not recommended due to thermal characteristics
follow these recommendations could cause damage to that may cause loose terminations resulting from the
the unit, or loss of performance, and may invalidate the contraction and expansion of the wiring. Aluminum
warranty. oxide may also build up at the termination causing hot
spots and eventual failure. If aluminum wiring is used
When ducting is to be fitted to the fan discharge it is to supply power to the chiller, AL-CU compression
recommended that the duct should be the same cross- fittings should be used to transition from aluminum to
sectional area as the fan outlet and straight for at least copper. This transition should be done in an external
three feet (1 meter) to obtain static regain from the fan. box separate to the power panel. Copper conductors
Duct work should be suspended with flexible hangers can then be run from the box to the chiller.
to prevent noise and vibration being transmitted to the
structure. A flexible joint is also recommended between A 120-1-60, 15 amp source must be supplied for the
the duct attached to the fan and the next section for the control panel through a fused disconnect when a control
same reason. Flexible connectors should not be allowed panel transformer (optional) is not provided (Refer to
to concertina. Fig. 9).
The unit(s) is not designed to take structural loading. No See unit wiring diagrams for field and power wiring
significant amount of weight should be allowed to rest connections, chilled water pump starter contacts,
on the fan outlet flange, deck assemblies or condenser alarm contacts, compressor run status contacts, PWM
coil module. No more than 3 feet (1 meter) of light input, and load limit input. Refer to the section on
construction duct work should be supported by the unit. “Unit Operation” located in this IOM for a detailed
Where cross winds may occur, any duct work must be description of operation concerning aforementioned
supported to prevent side loading on the unit. contacts and inputs.
If the ducts from two or more fans are to be combined Evaporator Pump Start Contacts
into a common duct, back-flow dampers should be Terminal Block XTBC2 – Terminals 23 to 24, are nor
fitted in the individual fan ducts. This will prevent re- mally open contacts that can be used to switch field
circulation of air when only one of the fans is running. supplied power to provide a start signal to the evaporator
pump contactor. The contacts will be closed when any
Units are supplied with outlet guards for safety and of the following conditions occur:
to prevent damage to the fan blades. If these guards
are removed to fit duct work, adequate alternative
1. Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault
precautions must be taken to ensure persons cannot be
2. Any compressor is running
harmed or put at risk from rotating fan blades.
3. Daily schedule is not programmed OFF and the
WIRING Unit Switch is ON
Liquid Chillers are shipped with all factory-mounted The pump will not run if the micropanel has been
controls wired for operation. powered up for less than 30 seconds, or if the pump
has run in the last 30 seconds, to prevent pump motor
Field Wiring – Power wiring must be provided through overheating. Refer to Fig. 10 and unit wiring dia
a fused disconnect switch to the unit terminals (or gram.
optional molded disconnect switch) in accordance with
N.E.C. or local code requirements. Minimum circuit System Run Contacts
ampacity and maximum dual element fuse size are Contacts are available to monitor system status.
given in Tables 6. Normally‑open auxiliary contacts from each compressor
contactor are wired in parallel with XTBC2 – Terminals
25 to 26 for system 1, and XTBC2 – Terminals 27 to
28 for system 2. Refer to Fig. 4, 10 and unit wiring
diagram.
40 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Alarm Status Contacts Load Limit Input

Normally‑open contacts are available for each refrigerant Load limiting is a feature that prevents the unit from
system. These normally‑open contacts close when the loading beyond a desired value. The unit can be
system is functioning normally. The respective contacts “load limited” either 33%, 40%, 50%, 66% or 80%,
will open when the unit is shut down on a unit fault, or depending on the number of compressors on unit. The
locked out on a system fault. Field connections are at
field connections are wired to XTBC1 – Terminals 13
XTBC2 - Terminals 29 to 30 (system 1), and Terminals
31 to 32 (system 2). to 21, and work in conjunction with the PWM inputs. A
detailed explanation is provided in the “Unit Controls”
Remote Start/Stop Contacts section of this IOM. Refer to Fig. 4, 10 and unit wiring
diagram.
To remotely start and stop the chiller, dry contacts can
be wired in series with the flow switch and XTBC1 ‑
When using the Load Limit feature,
Terminals 13 to 14. Refer to Fig 4, 10 and unit wiring
the PWM feature will not function –
diagram.
SIMULTANEOUS OPERATION OF
Remote Emergency Cutoff LOAD LIMITING AND TEM 4
PERATURE RESET (PWM INPUT)
Immediate shutdown of the chiller can be accomplished
CANNOT BE DONE.
by opening a field-installed dry contact to break the
electrical circuit between Terminals 5 to L on Terminal
Flow Switch Input
Block XTBC2. The unit is shipped with a factory jumper
installed between Terminals 5 to L, which must be The flow switch is field wired to XTBC1 Terminals 13
removed if emergency shutdown contacts are installed. ‑ 14. See Fig. 4 and unit wiring diagram.
Refer to Fig. 10 and unit wiring diagram.
COMPRESSOR HEATERS
Remote Temp Reset Input Compressor heaters are standard. ZP103, ZP120
The Remote Temp Reset input allows reset of the chilled & ZP137 compressors utilize 90W heaters; ZP180
liquid setpoint by supplying a voltage or current signal compressors utilize 70W heaters; ZP235 compressors
field wiring should be connected to XTBC1 – Terminals utilize 120W heaters. If power is OFF more than two
A+ to A-. A detailed explanation is provided in the “Unit hours, the crankcase heaters must be energized for 18 –
Controls” section of this IOM. Refer to Fig’s. 3, 4 and 24 hours prior to restarting a compressor. This will assure
unit wiring diagram. that liquid slugging and oil dilution does not damage the
compressors on start.
RELIEF VALVES
Relief valves are located on both the high and low
pressure side of the piping. High side relief valve
pressure setting is 650 PSIG. Low side relief valve
pressure setting is 450 PSIG.
HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT

A high pressure cutout is installed in the discharge piping
of each system. The cutout opens at 585 PSIG ± 10
PSIG and closes at 440 PSIG ± 25 PSIG.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 41
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED

DISCONNECT SWITCH OR CIRCUIT BREAKER
Power Panel Control Panel
14
13 XTBC1
Terminal Block, MICROPANEL
NF Disconnect SW
or Circuit Breaker
Flow Switch
1L1 1L2 1L3
GRD
L 2
XTBC2
Field Provided 120-1-60

Micropanel Power Supply if
Control Transformer not supplied.
Field Field supplied control power wiring
Provided must be run in separate grounded
Unit Power conduit. Never run control wiring
See electrical note 9 Supply in the same conduit with power
wiring.
LD13141
Electrical Notes and Legend located on page 53.
FIG. 9 – SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH

OR CIRCUIT BREAKER
It is possible that multiple sources The unit evaporator heater uses

of power can be supplying the unit 120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
power panel. To prevent serious power from the unit, at or below freez-
injury or death, the technician ing temperatures, can result in dam-
should verify that NO LETHAL age to the evaporator and unit as a
VOLTAGES are present inside the result of the chilled liquid freezing.
panel AFTER disconnecting power,
PRIOR to working on equipment.
42 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
USER CONTROL WIRING INPUTS
A-
INTERNAL WIRING TO OPTIONAL REMOTE TEMP. RESET BOARD
A+
14
FLOW SWITCH
13
50
13 4
21
REMOTE UNLOAD STEP 1
13
20
PWM REMOTE TEMP RESET
13
19 INTERNAL WIRING TO 2-KCR CONTROL RELAY
13
18 INTERNAL WIRING TO 1-KCR CONTROL RELAY
13
51
REMOTE START / STOP
13
XTBC1 LD13130
FIG. 10 – CONTROL WIRING INPUTS
All externally supplied contacts must The unit evaporator heater uses
be capable of switching 24 VDC / 115 120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
VAC. Gold contacts are recommended. power from the unit, at or below freez-
If supplied contacts are from a Relay ing temperatures, can result in damage
/ Contactor (Inductive Load), the coil to the evaporator and unit as a result
of the Relay / Contactor must be sup- of the chilled liquid freezing.
pressed. Typical suppressor is P/N
031-00808-000.
It is possible that multiple sources of
power can be supplying the unit power
panel. To prevent serious injury or
death, the technician should verify
that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are
present inside the panel AFTER dis-
connecting power, PRIOR to working
on equipment.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 43
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
USER CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS
140 INTERNAL WIRING TO EVAPORATOR HEATER

123 INTERNAL WIRING TO HOT GAS SOLENOID VALVE
32
SYSTEM 2 ALARM DRY CONTACTS (OPEN = ALARM)
31
30
SYSTEM 1 ALARM DRY CONTACTS (OPEN = ALARM)
29
28
SYSTEM 2 RUN DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN)
27
26
SYSTEM 1 RUN DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN)
25
24 EVAPORATOR PUMP DRY CONTACTS (CLOSE = RUN
23 BASED ON DAILY SCHEDULE)
Normally jumpered. 5 INTERNAL 120 VAC WIRING TO F1 FUSE

Can be used as
EMERGENCY STOP L INTERNAL 120 VAC WIRING (TYPICALLY FROM CONTROL TRANSFORMER)
contacts from an 2 INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING
external source.
2 INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING (TYPICALLY FROM CONTROL TRANSFORMER)
2 INTERNAL NEUTRAL WIRING
GND
LD13242
XTBC2
FIG. 11 – CONTROL WIRING OUTPUTS
All chiller supplied contacts are rated It is possible that multiple sources of
at 115 VAC, 100 VA, resistive load only, power can be supplying the unit power
and must be suppressed at the load panel. To prevent serious injury or
by user if powering an inductive load death, the technician should verify
(Relay / Contactor Coil). Typical sup- that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are
pressor P/N is 031-00808-000. present inside the panel AFTER dis-
on equipment.
The unit evaporator heater uses

120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
power from the unit, at or below freez-
ing temperatures, can result in damage
to the evaporator and unit as a result
of the chilled liquid freezing.
44 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA

OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS (ENGLISH)
TABLE 1 – TEMPERATURES AND FLOWS
Nominal Evaporator Water Flow

Temperature (°F) Water Flow (gpm) Air On Condenser (°F)
Unit Designation
MIN MAX MIN MAX MIN MAX
YLAA0285SE 40 55 100 355 0 125
YLAA0320SE 40 55 100 385 0 125
YLAA0360SE 40 55 100 385 0 125
YLAA0400SE 40 55 120 625 0 125
YLAA0435SE 40 55 120 625 0 125
YLAA0485SE 40 55 150 625 0 125
High Efficiency
YLAA0195HE 40 55 100 355 0 125
YLAA0220HE 40 55 100 355 0 125
YLAA0260HE 40 55 100 385 0 125
YLAA0300HE 40 55 100 385 0 125
YLAA0350HE 40 55 120 625 0 125
YLAA0390HE 40 55 180 650 0 125
YLAA0440HE 40 55 150 625 0 125
YLAA0445HE 40 55 120 625 0 125 5
YLAA0515HE 40 55 180 650 0 125
NOTES:
1. For leaving brine temperature below 4°C (40°F), contact your nearest Johnson Controls Office for application requirements.
2. For leaving water temperature higher than 13°C (55°F), contact the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application guidelines.
3. The evaporator is protected against freezing to -29°C (-20°F) with an electric heater as standard.
4. For operation at temperatures below -4°C (25°F), the optional Low Ambient Kit will need to be installed on the system.
5. For operation at temperatures above 46°C (115°F), the optional High Ambient Kit will need to be installed on the system.
Excessive flow will cause damage to VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS

the cooler. Do not exceed max. cooler The following voltage limitations are absolute and
flow. Special care should be taken operation beyond these limitations may cause serious
when multiple chillers are fed by a damage to the compressor.
single pump.
TABLE 2 – VOLTAGE LIMITATIONS
UNIT POWER MIN. MAX.
200-3-60 180 220
230-3-60 207 253
380-3-60 355 415
460-3-60 414 506
575-3-60 517 633
JOHNSON CONTROLS 45
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
HEAT EXCHANGER FLOW, GPM
Y L AA E v a p o ra to r P re s s u re D ro p (S I U n its )
1000
D
A E
100 B
P re s s u re D ro p (k P a )
10
1
1 10 100
W a te r F lo w R a te (l/s )
CURVE MODEL YLAA

A 240SE, 195HE, 220HE
B 320SE, 360SE, 260HE, 300HE
C 400SE, 435SE, 350HE, 455HE
D 485SE, 440HE
E 390HE, 515HE
TABLE 3 – ETHYLENE & PROPYLENE GLYCOL CORRECTION FACTORS
ETHYLENE GLYCOL PROPYLENE GLYCOL

TONS GPM°F/ PRESS TONS GPM°F/ PRESS
% WEIGHT COMPR FREEZE PT % WEIGHT COMPR FREEZE PT
kW TON DROP kW TON DROP
10 0.985 0.997 24.1 1.034 26 10 0.983 0.996 24.2 1.048 27
20 0.981 0.996 24.9 1.062 16 20 0.974 0.995 24.4 1.086 19
30 0.974 0.995 26.1 1.096 5 30 0.961 0.990 25.1 1.134 8
40 0.966 0.991 27.5 1.134 -10 40 0.946 0.98 26.0 1.186 -5
50 0.957 0.989 29.1 1.172 -32 50 0.928 0.984 27.2 1.247 -25
Note: Water Pressure Drop Curves may extend past the minimum and maximum water flow ranges.
46 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)

STANDARD EFFICIENCY YLAA0285 - YLAA0485
50Hz
TABLE 4 – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)
Refrigerant R-410A STANDARD EFFICIENCY UNITS
General Unit Data YLAA 0285 0320 0360 0400 0435 0485
Nominal Kw, R-410A 276 310 344 386 418 466
Length (mm) 2949 2949 3690 3690 3690 3690
Width (mm) 2235 2235 2242 2242 2242 2242
Height (mm) 2393 2393 2393 2393 2393 2393
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge, Operating
R-410A, ckt1 / ckt2, KG 24/24 26/26 28 / 26 35 / 29 35 / 33 32 / 33
Oil Charge, ckt1 / ckt2, LITERS 12.6 / 10.4 12.6 / 12.6 18.9 / 12.4 18.9 / 12.6 18.9 / 20.4 18.9 / 18.9
Shipping Weight 2183 2274 2630 2701 2900 3042
5
Operating Weight 2367 2469 2824 2908 3107 3290
Compressors, scroll type
Compressors per circuit 2/2 2/2 3/3 3/2 3/3 3/3
Compressors per unit 4 4 6 5 6 6
Condenser
Total Face Area M2 10.0 10.0 12.6 12.6 15.0 15.0
Number of Rows 1 1 1 1 1 1
Condenser Fans, Low Sound
Number of Fans, ckt1./ckt2. 2/2 2/2 3/2 3/2 3/3 3/3
Fan hp 2 2 2 2 2 2
Fan RPM 950 950 950 950 950 950
Total Chiller m3/sec 26 26 32.5 32.5 39 39
Evaporator
Water Volume, liters 184 195 193 208 208 250
Maximum Water Side Pressure,
10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3
bar
Maximum Refrigerant Side
31 31 31 31 31 31
Pressure, bar
Water Connections Size, inch 6 6 6 8 8 8
JOHNSON CONTROLS 47
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)

HIGH EFFICIENCY YLAA0195 - YLAA0515
50Hz
TABLE 4A – PHYSICAL DATA (ENGLISH)
Refrigerant R-410A HIGH EFFICIENCY UNITS
General Unit Data YLAA 0195 0220 0260 0300 0350 0390 0440 0455 0515
Nominal Kw, R-410A 191 213 253 310 346 386 429 451 521
Length (mm) 2949 2949 2949 3690 3690 3690 4807 4807 4807
Width (mm) 2235 2235 2235 2242 2242 2242 2242 2242 2242
Height (mm) 2393 2393 2393 2393 2393 2393 2393 2393 2393
Number of Refrigerant Circuits 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Refrigerant Charge, Operating
R-410A, ckt1 / ckt2, KG 22 / 13 22/22 26/26 28 / 26 29 / 30 40 / 34 36 / 32 37 / 35 40 / 41
12.4 / 10.4 / 10.4 / 12.6 / 12.6 / 18.9 / 18.9 / 18.9 / 18.9 /
Oil Charge, ckt1 / ckt2, LITERS
6.5 8.3 10.4 10.4 12.6 10.4 12.6 20.4 18.9
Shipping Weight 1921 2042 2134 2416 2598 2859 3171 3281 3488
Operating Weight 2106 2227 2328 2610 2805 3151 3421 3489 3779
Compressors, scroll type
Compressors per circuit 3/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 2/2 3/2 3/2 3/3 3/3
Compressors per unit 5 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6
6
Condenser
Total Face Area M2 7.5 10.0 10.0 12.6 15.1 15.1 17.6 20.1 20.1
Number of Rows 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Condenser Fans, Low Sound
Number of Fans, ckt1./ckt2. 2/2 2/2 2/2 3/2 3/3 3/3 4/3 4/4 4/4
Fan hp 2 / .5 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
950 /
Fan RPM 950 950 950 950 950 950 950 950
850
Total Chiller m3/sec 19 26 26 32.5 39 39 45.5 52 52
Evaporator
Water Volume, liters 185 185 194 193 208 293 250 208 293
Maximum Water Side Pressure,
10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3 10.3
bar
Maximum Refrigerant Side
43 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31
Pressure, bar
Water Connections Size, inch 3 6 6 6 8 8 8 8 8
48 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ELECTRICAL INFORMATION
TABLE 5 – MICROPANEL POWER SUPPLY
CONTROL OVER CURRENT PROTECTION,

UNIT VOLTAGE MCA
POWER SEE NOTE B NF DISC Sw
UNIT NOTE A
MODELS w/o MIN MAX
VOLTAGE
CONTROL 115-1-60/50
15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V
TRANS
-17 200-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V
-28 230-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 240V
MODELS w/
-40 380-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 480V
CONTROL
-46 460-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 480V
TRANS
-50 380/415-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30A / 415V
-58 575-1-60 15A 10A 15A 30 A / 600V
A. Minimum #14 AWG, 75 °C, Copper Recommended

B. Minimum and Maximum Over Current Protection, Dual Element Fuse or Circuit Breaker
It is possible that multiple sources of The unit evaporator heater uses

power can be supplying the unit power 120VAC. Disconnecting 120VAC
panel. To prevent serious injury or power from the unit, at or below freez-
5
death, the technician should verify ing temperatures, can result in damage
that NO LETHAL VOLTAGES are to the evaporator and unit as a result
present inside the panel AFTER dis- of the chilled liquid freezing.
on equipment.
TABLE 6 – VOLTAGE RANGE
VOLTAGE RANGE
VOLTAGE CODE UNIT POWER MIN. MAX.
-17 200-3-60 180 220
-28 230-3-60 207 253
-40 380/415-3-60 342 440
-46 460-3-60 414 506
-50 380/415-3-50 342 440
-58 575-3-60 517 633
JOHNSON CONTROLS 49
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ELECTRICAL NOTES
NOTES:
1. Minimum Circuit Ampacity (MCA) is based on 125% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of
the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 430‑24. If the optional Factory
Mounted Control Transformer is provided, add the following MCA values to the electrical tables for the system
providing power to the transformer: ‑17, add 2.5 amps; ‑28, add 2.3 amps; ‑40, add 1.5 amps, ‑46, add 1.3 amps;
‑58, add 1 amps.
2. The minimum recommended disconnect switch is based on 115% of the rated load amps for all loads included
in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440.
3. Minimum fuse size is based upon 150% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load
amps for all other loads included in the circuit to avoid nuisance trips at start‑up due to lock rotor amps. It is not
recommended in applications where brown outs, frequent starting and stopping of the unit, and/or operation at
ambient temperatures in excess of 95ºF (35ºC) is anticipated.
4. Maximum fuse size is based upon 225% of the rated load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated
load amps for all other loads included in the circuit, per N.E.C. Article 440-22.
5. Circuit breakers must be UL listed and CSA certified and maximum size is based on 225% of the rated load
amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit. Otherwise,
HACR‑type circuit breakers must be used. Maximum HACR circuit breaker rating is based on 225% of the rated
load amps for the largest motor plus 100% of the rated load amps for all other loads included in the circuit.
6. The “INCOMING WIRE RANGE" is the minimum and maximum wire size that can be accommodated by the
unit wiring lugs. The (2) preceding the wire range indicates the number of termination points available per phase
of the wire range specified. Actual wire size and number of wires per phase must be determined based on the
National Electrical Code, using copper connectors only. Field wiring must also comply with local codes.
7. A ground lug is provided for each compressor system to accommodate a field grounding conductor per N.E.C.
Table 250‑95. A control circuit grounding lug is also supplied.
8. The supplied disconnect is a “Disconnecting Means” as defined in the N.E.C. 100, and is intended for isolating the
unit for the available power supply to perform maintenance and troubleshooting. This disconnect is not intended
to be a Load Break Device.
9. Field Wiring by others which complies to the National Electrical Code & Local Codes.
LEGEND
ACR-LINE ACROSS THE LINE START VOLTAGE CODE
C.B. CIRCUIT BREAKER -50 = 380/415-3-50
D.E. DUAL ELEMENT FUSE
DISC SW DISCONNECT SWITCH
FACT MOUNT CB FACTORY MOUNTED CIRCUIT BREAKER
FLA FULL LOAD AMPS
HZ HERTZ
MAX MAXIMUM
MCA MINIMUM CIRCUIT AMPACITY
MIN MINIMUM
MIN NF MINIMUM NON FUSED
RLA RATED LOAD AMPS
S.P. WIRE SINGLE POINT WIRING
UNIT MTD SERV SW UNIT MOUNTED SERVICE (NON-FUSED DISCONNECT
SWITCH)
LRA LOCKED ROTOR AMPS
50 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ELECTRICAL DATA
Dual Point Data

Single Point Data
System 1 System 2
CHILLER MAX
VOLT HZ MIN DUAL MIN DUAL MAX DUAL
MODEL MINIMUM MAX DUAL MINIMUM MIN DUAL DUAL MINIMUM
MIN N/F ELEM MIN N/F MIN N/F ELEM ELEM
CIRCUIT ELEM FUSE CIRCUIT ELEM FUSE ELEM CIRCUIT
DISC SW FUSE & DISC SW DISC SW FUSE & FUSE &
AMPS & MAX CB AMPS & MIN CB FUSE & AMPS
MIN CB MIN CB MAX CB
MAX CB
YLAA0285SE 400 50 218 250 250 250 131 150 150 175 101 150 125 150
YLAA0320SE 400 50 248 400 300 300 131 150 150 175 131 150 150 175
YLAA0360SE 400 50 272 400 300 300 189 250 225 225 90 100 100 110
YLAA0400SE 400 50 306 400 350 350 189 250 225 225 131 150 150 175
YLAA0435SE 400 50 327 400 350 350 189 250 225 225 148 200 175 175
YLAA0485SE 400 50 365 600 400 400 189 250 225 225 189 250 225 225
YLAA0195HE 400 50 136 150 150 150 90 100 100 110 52 60 60 70
YLAA0220HE 400 50 159 200 175 200 101 150 125 150 64 100 80 80
YLAA0260HE 400 50 189 250 225 225 101 150 125 150 101 150 125 150
YLAA0300HE 400 50 222 250 250 250 135 150 150 175 101 150 125 150
YLAA0350HE 400 50 256 400 300 300 135 150 150 175 135 150 150 175
YLAA0390HE 400 50 281 400 300 300 193 250 225 225 101 150 125 150 5
YLAA0440HE 400 50 314 400 350 350 193 250 225 225 135 150 150 175
YLAA0455HE 400 50 335 400 350 350 193 250 225 225 152 200 175 175
YLAA0515HE 400 50 373 600 400 400 193 250 225 225 193 250 225 225
Electrical Data
SYSTEM #1 SYSTEM #2 Sys 1 Sys 2
COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 COMPR 1 COMPR 2 COMPR 3 COND FANS COND FANS
CHILLER
VOLT HZ
MODEL
RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA RLA LRA QTY FLA LRA QTY FLA LRA
YLAA0285SE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 54.5 310 25.1 198 N/A N/A 2 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0320SE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 2 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0360SE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 25.1 198 25.1 198 25.1 198 3 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0400SE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 3 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0435SE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 41.9 272 41.9 272 41.9 272 3 4 19 3 4 19
YLAA0485SE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 3 4 19 3 4 19
YLAA0195HE 400 50 25.1 198 25.1 198 25.1 198 21.8 140 21.8 140 N/A N/A 2 4 19 2 1.4 3.4
YLAA0220HE 400 50 54.5 310 25.1 198 N/A N/A 25.1 198 25.1 198 N/A N/A 2 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0260HE 400 50 54.5 310 25.1 198 N/A N/A 54.5 310 25.1 198 N/A N/A 2 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0300HE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 54.5 310 25.1 198 N/A N/A 3 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0350HE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 3 4 19 3 4 19
YLAA0390HE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 25.1 198 N/A N/A 4 4 19 2 4 19
YLAA0440HE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 N/A N/A 4 4 19 3 4 19
YLAA0455HE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 41.9 272 41.9 272 41.9 272 4 4 19 4 4 19
YLAA0515HE 400 50 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 54.5 310 4 4 19 4 4 19
JOHNSON CONTROLS 51
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
WIRING LUGS
Lugs
CHILLER
VOLT HZ
MODEL
ETL NFDS w/ Individual ETL Dual Pt CE
ETL TB ETL NFDS ETL CB
System CBs CB per Sys NFDS
1xx 2xx 3xx
4xx 5xx W/ MMS
YLAA0285SE 400 50 (1) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL N/A (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0320SE 400 50 (1) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL N/A (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0485SE 400 50 (2) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL N/A (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
YLAA0195HE 400 50 (1) #4 - 500 kCMIL (1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL (1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL (1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL N/A (1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL
YLAA0300HE 400 50 (1) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (1) #6 AWG - 350 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL N/A (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
(1) 250 - 500 kCMIL
YLAA0350HE 400 50 (1) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL N/A (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
& (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0390HE 400 50 (1) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL N/A (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0440HE 400 50 (2) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL N/A (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL
YLAA0455HE 400 50 (2) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL N/A (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
YLAA0515HE 400 50 (2) #4 - 500 kCMIL (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL (2) #3/0 AWG - 250 kCMIL (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL N/A (2) 250 - 500 kCMIL
52 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND
035-21966-101 REV G
Des ignation DESCRIPTION Des ignation DESCRIPTION

A CC A CCESSORY -QCB CIRCUIT BREAKER
- ADIS DISPLAY BOARD -QMMSC MANUA L MOTOR STA RTER COMPRESSOR
- A MB MICRO BOA RD - QMMSP MA NUA L MOTOR STA RTER PUMP
-QSD SWITCH DISCONNECT
- BAMB A MBIENT
-BDA T DISCHA RGE AIR TEMPERATURE R RESISTOR
- BDP DISCHA RGE PRESSURE RED RED
- BECT ENTERING CHILLED TEMPERATURE RP RUN PERMISSIV E
- BLCT LEAV ING CHILLED TEMPERATURE RU REMOTE UNLOAD Ist STEP
NOT FITTED ON REMOTE EV AP. UNITS
SCH THERMOSTA T CRANKCASE HEATER
-BMP MOTOR PROTECTOR COMPRESSOR SCR SCREEN
- BSP SUCTION PRESSURE - SF FLOW SWITCH
- SKP KEYPAD
-CPF CAPACITOR POWER FA CTOR - SOA SWITCH OFF A UTO
-SZT ZONE THERMOSTAT
- ECH CRA NKCASE HEATER
-EEH EVA PORATOR HEA TER -T TRANSFORMER
- EHRH HEA T RECOV ERY HEA TER - TC TRA NSFORMER CURRENT
-EPH PUMP HEATER 5
-EXT EXTERNA L TO CONTROL PANEL -UBR BRIDGE RECTIFIER
-F FUSE -WHT WHITE

- FHP HIGH PRESSURE CUTOUT - XP PLUGS BETWEEN POW./MICRO. SECTION
-FSC FAN SPEED CONTROLLER - XTBC TERMINA L BLOCK CUSTOMER
FAN SPEED INHIBIT TWO SPEED - XTBF TERMINA L BLOCK FACTORY
-FSI
FAN OPTION ONLY
-YESV EV APORATOR SOLENOID V ALVE
GND GROUND -YHGSV HOT GAS SOLENOID V ALVE
G/Y GREEN / YELLOW (INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
LIQUID LINE SOLENOID V ALVE
J PLUG BOA RD CONNECTOR - Y LLSV FIELD MOUNTED A ND WIRED ON REMOTE
EV AP. UNIT
-K CIRCUIT BOA RD RELA Y - Z CPR COMPRESSOR

-KF (INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
-KFH FAN CONTACTOR HIGH SPEED
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
-KFL FAN CONTACTOR LOW SPEED NOTE WELL {SEE NOTE}
NB
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR)
-KFOL FAN OVERLOAD
-KFS RELA Y FA N SPEED WIRING AND ITEMS SHOWN THUS
-KH HEATER RELAY ARE STANDARD Y ORK ACCESSORIES
-KM COMPRESSOR CONTA CTOR
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR) WIRING AND ITEMS SHOWN THUS
-KCR CONTROL RELAY ARE NOT SUPPLIED BY Y ORK
-KP PUMP CONTA CTOR PA RT
(INCLUDING COIL SUPPRESSOR) ITEMS THUS ENCLOSED FORM A
-KT RELA Y TIMER COMPONENTS OR SETS OFCOMPONENTS
-M COMPRESSOR MOTOR
-MF MOTOR FAN
-MP MOTOR PUMP
NU NOT USED
PE PROTECTIV E EARTH
PWM PULSE WIDTH MODULATION TEMP
035-21966-101 REV G
RESET or REMOTE UNLOAD 2nd STEP
JOHNSON CONTROLS 53
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND (CONTINUED)

035-21966-101 REV G
GENERAL
A. This drawing is based on IEC symbols.
B. Field wiring to be in accordance with the relevant electrical code as well as all other applicable codes and specifications.
C. All sources of supply shown on this diagram to be taken from one main isolator, not shown or supplied by YORK.
Green and yellow wire is used for earth, multi-colored cable used for low voltage. Red wire used for AC Control, blue wire for neutral,
D.
black wire for AC and DC power. Orange wire should be used for interlock control wiring supplied by external source.
Legend designation depicts component abbreviations. Number prefix located, if applicable, on schematic circuit, refers to system
E.
thereon, E.G. = 1-FHP2 refers to high pressure cutout no 2 on system no 1.
All wiring to control section voltage free contacts requires a supply provided by the customer maximum voltage 120 volts. The
customer must take particular care when deriving the supplies for the voltage free terminals with regard to a common point of
isolation. Thus, these circuits when used must be fed via the common point of isolation the voltage to these circuits is removed when
F.
the common point of isolation to the unit is opened. This common point of isolation is not supplied by YORK. The YORK voltage free
contacts are rated at 100va. All inductive devices {relays} switch by the YORK voltage free contacts must have their coil suppressed
using standard R/C suppressors.
G. Customer voltage free contacts connected to terminal 13 must be rated at 30V 5ma.
No controls {relays etc.} Should be mounted in any section of the control panel. Additionally, control wiring not connected to
H. the YORK control panel should not be run through the panel. If these precautions are not followed, electrical noise could cause
malfunctions or damage to the unit and its controls.
I. 120/14.3 - (Signal IN/OUT) i.e. 120 is wire # and 14.3 refers to SHT. 14 column 3.
NOTES
Refer to installation commissioning operation and maintenance manual for customer connections and customer connection notes,
1
non compliance to these instructions will invalidate unit warranty.
Wiring and components for compressor 3 only fitted when unit has 3 compressors on the system. 1-BMP3 is replaced by a link
2
across terminals 134 & 135. 2-BMP3 is replaced by a link across terminals 234 & 235.
3
4 Fitted on units with hot gas bypass option.
5 EMS option is wired as shown.
6 This wiring must be used for old display 031-0110-000.
7 Network connection point.
8 Printer port.
9 Remote emergency stop can be wired between terminal l and 5 after removing link.
10 Power factor correction accessory. Power factor correction fitted to each compressor contactor.
Not fitted on compressors with internal motor protection. For system 1 terminals 132 & 133, 133 & 134 and 134 & 135 are linked. For
11
system 2 terminals 232 & 233, 233 & 234 and 234 & 235 are linked.
12 Only fitted on systems with 3 or 4 fans.
13 Only fitted on systems with 4 fans.
16 Input switch disconnect (standard on CE units) or circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
17 Input switch disconnect & individual system circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
18 115V control circuit requires a 115V supply unless control circuit transformer -T2 & -F3 are fitted (standard on CE units).
For optional hydro kit. Heater -EPH is fitted and wired as shown. On single pump -KP1, -QMMSP1 & -MP1 are fitted & wired as
19
shown. On two pump hydro kits -KP2, -QMMSP2 & -MP2 are also fitted and wired as shown.
20 Current measurement option wired as show.
54 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ELECTRICAL NOTES AND LEGEND (CONTINUED)
21 Only fitted on systems with single speed fans.

22 Only fitted on systems with two speed fans.
23 Optional compressor manual motors starters (standard on CE units).
24 See sheet 3 of connection diagram for power input options.
25 Alternate connections shown for different two speed motor types.
26 Only fitted on systems with a maximum of 4 fans.
27 220/230V units require a separate fuse for units w/4 or more fans per system.
28 Low ambient kit -FSC for fan -MF1 is only fitted on systems with less than 4 fans.
29 Only fitted on YLAA0350.
30 Only fitted on YLAA0195 & 0350.
31 Input dual point circuit breaker option replaces input terminal block.
32 Field installed on remote evaporator units.
33 Fitted on units with single phase motors only.
34 Fitted on units with low ambient option only.
35 Only fitted on units with an acoustic kit.
36 Only fitted on heat recovery units.
37 Only fitted on condensing units.
38 Omitted on condensing units.
JOHNSON CONTROLS 55
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
WIRING DIAGRAMS
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21583-201 REV D
FIG. 12 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1
56 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 57
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-202 REV D
58 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 59
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-203 REV D
60 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 61
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-204 REV D
62 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 63
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
035-21583-205 REV D
64 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 65
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-206 REV D
66 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 67
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-207 REV D
68 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 69
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-208 REV D
70 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 71
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
035-21583-209 REV D
72 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 73
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0195
035-21589-201 REV D
FIG. 21 – CONNECTION WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0195 SHT 1
74 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 75
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21589-202 REV D
76 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 77
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21589-203 REV D
78 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 79
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21589-204 REV D
80 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 81
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
035-21589-205 REV D
82 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 83
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21589-206 REV D
84 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 85
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21589-207 REV D
86 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 87
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515
035-21583-101 REVBD
035-21583-101 REV
LD13143A
FIG. 28 – ELEMENTARY WIRING DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1
88 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LD13144A
JOHNSON CONTROLS 89
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
035-21583-102 REVREV
035-21583-102 D D
90 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 91
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-103 REV B
92 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 93
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

035-21583-104 REV B
94 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS 95
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS - YLAA0220 - YLAA0515

POWER PANEL
035-21589-101 REV C
035-21589-101 REV B
LD13235A
FIG. 32 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 1
96 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LD13236A
JOHNSON CONTROLS 97
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

MICROPANEL CONECTIONS
035-21589-102 REV D
035-21589-102 REV C
LD13240A
98 JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LD13241A
JOHNSON CONTROLS 99
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

POWER OPTIONS CONNECTION DIAGRAM
035-21589-103
035-21589-103 REV REVB
B
LD13234A
100 JOHNSON CONTROLS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LD13901
JOHNSON CONTROLS 101

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

COMPRESSOR WIRING
035-21589-106 REVC
035-21589-106 REV E
FIG. 35 – CONNECTION DIAGRAM, YLAA0220 - YLAA0515, SHT 6 LD13900

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LD13233A

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

CONDENSER FAN MAPPING AND SEQUENCING
035-21589-107 REV A
LD13147

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LD13232

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
WIRING DIAGRAM - POWER SUPPLY
SINGLE POINT WIRING OPTIONS
FIG. 37 – WIRING DIAGRAM, SINGLE POINT WIRING OPTIONS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DUAL PUMP WIRING
LD13237
FIG. 38 – DUAL PUMP WIRING

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
WIRING
LD13238
FIG. 39 – WIRING

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LD13239

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LAYOUT - POWER BLOCKS AND TRANSFORMERS
FIG. 40 – LAYOUT - POWER BLOCKS AND TRANSFORMERS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH)
YLAA0195HE
2398
2251
1082
381
822 473 2159

2242 2911
NOTE:
Placement on a level surface of free of obstructions safety cutouts; however, the system designer must
(including snow, for winter operation) or air circulation consider potential performance degradation. Access to
ensures rated performance, reliable operation, and ease the unit control center assumes the unit is no higher than
of maintenance. Site restrictions may compromise on spring isolators. Recommended minimum clearances:
minimum clearances indicated below, resulting in Side to wall – 6'; rear to wall – 6'; control panel to end
unpredictable airflow patterns and possible diminished wall – 4'0''; top – no obstructions allowed; distance
performance. Johnson Controls’s unit controls will between adjacent units – 10'. No more than one adjacent
optimize operation without nuisance high-pressure wall may be higher than the unit.
FIG. 41 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0195HE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0220HE, 0260HE, 0285SE, & 320SE (ENGLISH)
2391
2251
1082
381
822 457 2159

2242 2911
NOTE:
FIG. 42 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0220HE, 0260HE, 0285SE, & 320SE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0300HE,YLAA0360SE, YLAA0400SE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING

HOLES(TYP)
525
14012 2077
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH
VIEW B-B
BOTOM OF PANEL 79
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193
Y
2977
5
TOP VIEW
X
CG
B B 2393
6"
(WATER
INLET) 6"
(WATER OUTLET)
1086
2X 381
(2) RIGGING HOLES

780 588
473 EACH SIDE
TO CLR CONN
588 981
2242 BASE WIDTH
2261 3613
FRONT VIEW RIGHT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK
NOTE:
FIG. 43 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0300HE,YLAA0360SE, YLAA0400SE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0435SE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING

HOLES(TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY 14012

8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH 2077
BOTOM OF PANEL
VIEW B-B
81
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193 2977
TOP VIEW
Y
CG X
2393
B B
8"
(WATER
8"
INLET)
(WATER OUTLET)
1085
2X 414
861
749 498 1006
TO CLR CONN 588 (2) RIGGING HOLES 588
EACH SIDE
2242 BASE WIDTH
3613
2261
NOTE:
FIG. 44 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0435SE (ENGLISH)

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0350HE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING

HOLES(TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY
14012
2077
VIEW B-B
BOTOM OF PANEL
81
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193 2977 5
TOP VIEW
Y
X
CG
2393
B B
8"
(WATER
8"
INLET)
(WATER OUTLET)
1085
2X 414
861
749 1006
498
TO CLR CONN (2) RIGGING HOLES
588 588
2242 BASE WIDTH EACH SIDE
3613
2261
NOTE:
FIG. 45 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0350HE (ENGLISH)

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DIMENSIONS - YLAA0390HE, YLAA0485SE (ENGLISH)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING

HOLES(TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY 14012

VIEW B-B 2077
BOTOM OF PANEL
81
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193 2977
TOP VIEW
Y
X
CG
2393
B B
8"
(WATER
8"
INLET)
(WATER OUTLET)
1085
2X 438
861
749 562 460
TO CLR CONN 588 (2) RIGGING HOLES 588
2242 BASE WIDTH EACH SIDE
3613
2261
NOTE:
FIG. 46 – DIMENSIONS (ENGLISH) YLAA0390HE, YLAA0485SE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING

HOLES (TYP)
525
14012
POWER ENTRY
8712 WIDE X 178 HIGH 2077
VIEW B-B
BOTTOM OF PANEL
79
28 (TYP)
ORIGIN
193
1753 1918
Y
TOP VIEW
X
CG
8"
(WATER
INLET)
B B
2389
1082
2X 410
774 498 (3) RIGGING HOLES 2124

TO CLR CONN EACH SIDE
588
2242 BASE WIDTH 1473 1675
2261
4731
FRONT VIEW
FRONT VIEW
NOTE:

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
5/8" DIA MOUNTING

HOLES (TYP)
525
POWER ENTRY 14012

VIEW B-B
2077
BOTTOM OF PANEL
79 28 (TYP)
ORIGIN 5
193 1753 1918
Y TOP VIEW
X
CG
8"
(WATER
INLET) 8"
B B (WATER
2389 OUTLET)
1082
2X 438
774 (3) RIGGING HOLES

562 1578
TO CLR CONN EACH SIDE
2242 BASE WIDTH 588 1473 1675
2261
4731
FRONT VIEW
POWER: SINGLE POINT SUPPLY WITH TERMINAL BLOCK FRONT VIEW
NOTE:

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TECHNICAL DATA – CLEARANCES
(2 m)
(1.3 m) (2 m)
(2 m)
LD13243
NOTES:
1. No obstructions allowed above the unit.
2. Only one adjacent wall may be higher than the unit.
3. Adjacent units should be 10 feet (3 Meters) apart.
FIG. 50 – UNIT CLEARANCES – ALL MODELS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS

GENERAL
Whenever the isolator option is ordered, the isolators isolator location, select the appropriate isolator from the
will be shipped loose with the chiller. Use the drawings isolators packaged with the chiller. The isolator capacity
that follow to select the appropriate chiller model and ranges are provided in the information that follows based
weight by isolator location. Based on the weight by on type of isolator being installed.
L1 L2 L3
X R1 R2 R3
5
CG Y
YLAA0195HE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected) YLAA0195HE Isolator Locations (mm)
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 706 534 N/A L (495, 2207) (2641, 2207) N/A
R 527 398 N/A R (495, 36) (2461, 36) N/A
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 712 576 N/A L (495, 2207) (2641, 2207) N/A
R 519 398 N/A R (495, 36) (2461, 36) N/A
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 742 620 N/A L (495, 2207) (2641, 2207) N/A
R 526 439 N/A R (495, 36) (2461, 36) N/A
YLAA0285SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected) YLAA0285SE Isolator Locations (mm)
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 782 626 N/A L (495, 2207) (2641, 2207) N/A
R 533 427 N/A R (495, 36) (2461, 36) N/A
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 803 679 N/A L (495, 2207) (2641, 2207) N/A
R 534 452 N/A R (495, 36) (2461, 36) N/A
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS continued on next page

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
L1 L2 L3
continued from previous page
X R1 R2 R3
CG Y
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 933 811 N/A L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) N/A
R 694 603 N/A R (193, 36) (3170, 36) N/A
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 862 789 N/A L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) N/A
R 603 557 N/A R (193, 36) (3170, 36) N/A
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 1021 905 N/A L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) N/A
R 704 624 N/A R (193, 36) (3170, 36) N/A
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 939 922 N/A L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) N/A
R 650 639 N/A R (193, 36) (3170, 36) N/A
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 1050 931 N/A L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) N/A
R 720 639 N/A R (193, 36) (3170, 36) N/A
YLAA0435SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected) YLAA0435SE Isolator Weights Locations (mm)
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 976 933 N/A L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) N/A
R 613 586 N/A R (193, 36) (3170, 36) N/A
YLAA0485SE Isolator Weights (kg) (if selected) YLAA0485SE Isolator Weights Locations (mm)
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 1026 992 N/A L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) N/A
R 647 625 N/A R (193, 36) (3170, 36) N/A
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS continued on next page

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
continued from previous page
L1 L2 L3
X R1 R2 R3 5
CG Y
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 664 987 576 L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) (3863, 2207)
R 479 592 535 R (193, 36) (3170, 36) (3863, 36)
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 627 1085 595 L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) (3863, 2207)
R 454 609 533 R (193, 36) (3170, 36) (3863, 36)
1 2 3 1 2 3
L 673 1154 641 L (193, 2207) (3170, 2207) (3863, 2207)
R 503 647 574 R (193, 36) (3170, 36) (3863, 36)
FIG. 51 – WEIGHT DISTRIBUTION AND ISOLATOR MOUNTING POSITIONS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ISOLATOR DATA
ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
CP
5/8"
Ø1/2"
H"
C"
T"
B" L"
D"
W"
LD13759A
Mount Dimension Data (Inches)

Type
W D L B C T H
CP1 3 5/8 7-3/4 6-1/2 4-3/4 1/2 5-5/8
CP2 3 5/8 10-1/2 9-1/4 7-3/4 9/16 6
RATED CAPACITY (FOR UNITS WITH ALL

LOAD POINTS LESS THAN 1785 LBS (810 KG)
MODEL NUMBER COLOR CODE
(LBS.) (KG)
CP-1D-510 BLACK Up thru 434 Up thru 197

CP-1D-900 DARK GREEN 435 thru 765 198 thru 347
CP-1D-1200 GRAY 766 thru 1020 348 thru 463
CP-1D-1360 WHITE 1021 thru 1156 464 thru 524
CP-1D-1785N GRAY/RED 1157 thru 1785 525 thru 810
RATED CAPACITY (FOR UNITS WITH ANY

LOAD POINT ABOVE 1518 LBS (689 KG)
MODEL NUMBER COLOR CODE
(LBS.) (KG)
C2P-1D-1350 DARK PURPLE Up thru 1148 Up to 521

C2P-1D-1350 DARK PURPLE Up thru 1148 Up to 521
C2P-1D-1800 DARK GREEN 1149 thru 1530 522 - 694
C2P-1D-2400 GRAY 1531 thru 2040 695 - 925
C2P-1D-2400 GRAY 1531 thru 2040 695 - 925
C2P-1D-2720 WHITE 2041 thru 2312 926 - 1049
C2P-1D-3570N GRAY/RED 2313 thru 3570 1050 - 1619
FIG. 52 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning 5. Place equipment on top of isolators making sure
installation. that mounting holes of the equipment line up with
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be isolator positioning pin (“H”).
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw- 6. The adjustment process can only begin after the
ings or as otherwise reccomended. equipment or machine is at its full operating
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad or sub- weight.
base, ensuring that all isolators centerlines match 7. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group adjusting bolt (“D”) one full counterclockwise turn
reccomends that the isolator base (“B”) be installed at a time. Repeat this procedure on all isolators,
on a level surface. Shim or grout as required, level- one at a time.
ing all isolatorbases to the same elevation (1/4-inch 8. Continue adjusting each isolator until a minimum of
maximum difference can be tolerated). 1/4" clearance is achieved between the lower hous-
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supprting structure ing and upper housing. (See drawing below).
utilizing base slotted holes (“C”). 9. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
10. Installation is complete.
LD13790
FIG. 53 – ONE INCH DEFLECTION SPRING ISOLATORS INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SEISMIC ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
Y2RS
5" 1-1/8"
5/8" 2-3/4"
2-3/4"
12"
3/8" GAP
5/8-11UNC
Ø3/4" TYP. (4)
TYP.(4)
3/4"
7/8"
1/2" LIMIT
STOP &
NUT 8-3/8"
OPER.
HEIGHT
12-1/4"
14"
3-1/2"
3/8"
5"
NOTES:
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN INCHES, INTERPRET PER ANSI Y14.
2. STANDARD FINISH: HOUSING-POWDER COATED (COLOR:BLACK), SPRING-POWDER COATED (COLOR: SEE T
HARDWARE ZINC-ELECTROPLATE.
3. EQUIPMENT MUST BE BOLTED OR WELDED TO THE TOP PLATE TO MEET ALLOWABLE SEISMIC RATINGS.
4. ALL SPRINGS ARE DESIGNED FOR 50% OVERLOAD CAPACITY WITH EXCEPTION OF THE 2D-3280N & 2D-2870
5. REFER TO PAGE
NEXT PAGE FOR
FOR INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
INSTRUCTIONS.
6. CONSULT FACTORY FOR CONCRETE INSTALLATION.
LD13761A
VMC PART NUMBER VMC ISOL. COLOR WEIGHT RANGE (LBS) WEIGHT RANGE (KGS)
Y2RSI-2D-460 GREEN Up thru 391 UP TO 177
Y2RSI-2D-460 GREEN Up thru 391 UP TO 177
Y2RSI-2D-710 DARK BROWN 392 thru 604 178 - 274
Y2RSI-2D-870 RED 605 thru 740 275 - 336
Y2RSI-2D-1200N RED/BLACK 741 thru 1020 337 - 463
Y2RSI-2D-1690 PINK 1021 thru 1437 464 - 652
Y2RSI-2D-2640N PINK/GRAY 1438 thru 2244 653 - 1018
Y2RSI-2D-2870N PINK/GRAY/ORANGE 2245 thru 2618 1019 - 1188
Y2RSI-2D-3280N PINK/GRAY/DK.BROWN 2619 thru 3740 1189 - 1696
FIG. 54 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning equipment or bracket to the top plate (“A”) of isola-
installation. tor with a minimum of 3/8 fillet welds 2" long @
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be 3" on center for a minimum total weld of 10". (All
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw- sides of equipment or bracket resting on top plate
ings or as otherwise recommended. (“A”) must be welded).
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or sub- 7. The adjustment process can only begin after the
base, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match equipment or machine is at its full operating
the equipment mounting holes. The VMC group weight.
recommends that the isolator base plates (“B”) 8. Back off each of the (4) limit stop lock nuts (“F”)
be installed on a level surface. Shim or grout as on isolators 1/2".
required, leveling all isolator base plates to the 9. Adjust each isolator in sequence by turning spring
same elevation (1/4-inch maximum difference can adjusting nuts (“G”) one full clockwise turn at a
be tolerated). time. Repeat this procedure on all isolators, one at
4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure a time. Check the limit stop lock nuts (“F”) periodi-
utilizing base plate thru holes (“C”) or weld base cally to ensure that clearance between the washer
plate to supporting structure with 3/8 fillet weld and rubber grommet is maintained. Stop adjustment
2" long @ 4" on center around entire base plate or of isolator only when the top plate (“A”) has risen
as engineered for specific load and or field condi- just above the shim (“E”). 5
tions. 10. Remove all spacer shims (“E”).
5. Isolators are shipped to the job site with (2) remov- 11. Fine adjust isolators to level equipment.
able spacer shims (“E”) between the top plate and
12. Adjust all limit stop lock nuts (“F”) per isolator,
the housing. These shims must be in place when
maintaining 1/4-to 3/8-inch gap. The limit stop
the equipment is positioned over the isolators.
nuts must be kept at this gap to ensure uniform bolt
6. With all shims (“E”) in place, position equipment loading during uplift (as the case when equipment
on top of plate (“A”) of isolator. Bolt equipment is drained).
securely to top plate of isolator using a minimum
of (2) 5/8 UNC A325 grade 5 SAE bolts or weld
("A") ("E") CL ("G") ("E") ("A") CL

GROMMET
1/4 - 3/8 GAP EQUIPMENT
("F")
WASHER ("E")
("F")
("C")
("C")
("B")
LD13763B
FIG. 55 – SEISMIC ISOLATOR INSTALLATION AND ADJUSTMENT INSTRUCTIONS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE
RD-Style
Isolators
DW
CD
MOLDED
DURULENE
HF ø AD THRU
TYP 2 PLACES
BT
AL
W
L
Notes:
1. All dimensions are inches, interpreted per ANSI Y14.
2. Refer
Refer totonext
Page 98 for installation
page installationinstructions.
instructions.
3. Mount molded in weather resistant duralene compound as standard. Also available in other materials
such as natural rubber, extreme high temperature silicone, high-damped silicone, nitrile and EDPM.
4. AL = Mounting hole center to center spacing.
5. HF = Free height of mount, prior to loading. Operating height calculated by the free height less the
static deflection under load. All dimensions for reference only.
6. Hardware zinc-electroplated.
MOUNT DIMENSION DATA (INCHES)

TYPE L W HF AL AD BT CD DW
5/16-18 UNC
RD1-WR 3.13 1.75 1.25 2.38 0.34 0.19 1.25
X 3/4
RD2-WR 3.88 2.38 1.75 3.00 0.34 0.22 3/8-16 UNC X 1 1.75
RD3-WR 5.50 3.38 2.88 4.13 0.56 0.25 1/2-13 UNC X 1 2.50
RD4-WR 6.25 4.63 2.75 5.00 0.56 0.38 1/2-13 UNC X 1 3.00
VMC PART NUMBER VMC ISOL. COLOR WEIGHT RANGE (LBS) WEIGHT RANGE (KGS)
RD-3-CHARCOAL-WR CHARCOAL Up thru 825 UP TO 374
RD-4-BRICK RED-WR BRICK RED 826 thru 1688 375 - 766
RD-4-CHARCOAL-WR CHARCOAL 1689 thru 4000 767 - 1814
FIG. 56 – DURALENE ISOLATOR CROSS-REFERENCE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
INSTALLATION OF DURULENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS INSTRUCTIONS
1. Read instructions in their entirety before beginning all isolator bases to the same elevation (1/32-inch
installation. maximum difference can be tolerated).
2. Isolators are shipped fully assembled and are to be 4. Bolt or anchor all isolators to supporting structure
positioned in accordance with the submittal draw- utilizing base thru holes (“B”).
ings or as otherwise recommended. 5. Remove top bolt and top washer. Place equipment
3. Set isolators on floor, housekeeping pad, or sub- on top of isolators so that mounting holes in equip-
base, ensuring that all isolator centerlines match the ment or base line up with threaded hole (“C”).
equipment mounting holes. The VMC group rec- 6. Reinstall top bolt and washer and tighten down.
ommends that the isolator base (“A”) be installed on
a level surface. Shim or grout as required, leveling
TOP BOLT
("B")
TOP WASHER
D D
("C") 5
("B")
CL CL ("A")
SECTION D-D
LD13762B
FIG. 57 – INSTALLATION OF DURULENE VIBRATION ISOLATORS INSTRUCTIONS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 6 – COMMISSIONING
COMMISSIONING Compressor Oil
To add oil to a circuit – connect a YORK hand oil
Commissioning of this unit should pump (Part No. 470-10654-000) to the 1/4" oil charging
only be carried out by Johnson Con- connection on the compressors with a length of clean
trols Authorized personnel.
hose or copper line, but do not tighten the flare nut.
Using clean oil of the correct type (“V” oil), pump oil
until all air has been purged from the hose then tighten
the nut. Stroke the oil pump to add oil to the oil system.
Commissioning personnel should be thoroughly familiar Approximately 1.8-2.3 gallons is present in the each
with the information contained in this literature, in refrigerant system.
addition to this section.
Oil levels in the oil equalizing line sight glass should be
Perform the commissioning using the detailed checks between the bottom and the middle of the sight glass with
outlined in the “Equipment Pre-startup & Startup Check the system off. High oil levels may cause excessive oil
List” (Page 133) as the commissioning procedure is carryover in the system. High oil concentration in the
carried out. system may cause nuisance trips resulting from incorrect
readings on the level sensor and temperature sensors.
PREPARATION – POWER OFF Temperature sensor errors may result in poor liquid
The following basic checks should be made with the control and resultant liquid overfeed and subsequent
customer power to the unit switched OFF. damage to the compressor. While running, a visible sign
of oil splashing in the sight glass is normal.
Inspection
Fans 6
Inspect unit for installation damage. If found, take action
and/or repair as appropriate. Check that all fans are free to rotate and are not damaged.
Ensure blades are at the same height when rotated.
Refrigerant Charge Ensure fan guards are securely fixed.
Packaged units are normally shipped as standard with a Isolation / Protection
full refrigerant operating charge. Check that refrigerant
pressure is present in both systems and that no leaks are Verify all sources of electrical supply to the unit are taken
apparent. If no pressure is present, a leak test must be from a single point of isolation. Check that the maximum
undertaken, the leak(s) located and repaired. Remote recommended fuse sizes given in the “Technical Data”
systems and units are supplied with a nitrogen holding section of ths IOM have not been exceeded.
charge. These systems must be evacuated with a suitable
Control Panel
vacuum pump/recovery unit as appropriate to below
500 microns. Check the panel to see that it is free of foreign materials
(wire, metal chips, etc.) and clean out if required.
Do not liquid charge with static water in the cooler.
Care must also be taken to liquid charge slowly to avoid Power Connections
excessive thermal stress at the charging point. Once the Check that the customer power cables are connected
vacuum is broken, charge into the condenser coils with correctly to the terminal blocks or optional circuit
the full operating charge as given in the “Technical breaker. Ensure that connections of power cables within
Data” section of ths IOM. the panels to the circuit breaker or terminal blocks are
tight.
Service and Oil Line Valves
Open each compressor suction, economizer, and Grounding
discharge service valve. If valves are the back-seat type, Verify that the unit’s protective ground terminal(s) are
open them fully (counterclockwise) then close one turn properly connected to a suitable grounding point. Ensure
of the stem to ensure operating pressure is fed to pressure that all unit internal ground connections are tight.
transducers. Open the liquid line service valve and oil
return line ball valve fully in each system.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Supply Voltage
Verify that the site voltage supply corresponds to the Flow rates and pressure drops must be within the limits
unit requirement and is within the limits given in the given in the “Technical Data” section of ths IOM.
“Technical Data” section of ths IOM. Operation outside of these limits is undesirable and
could cause damage.
PREPARATION – POWER ON
If main power must be switched OFF for extended
Perform the commissioning using the maintenance or an extended shutdown period, the
compressor suction, discharge and economizer service
detailed checks outlined in the EQUIP-
stop valves should be closed (clockwise). If there is
MENT START-UP CHECK SHEET a possibility of liquid freezing due to low ambient
as the commissioning procedure is temperatures, the coolers should be drained or power
carried out. should be applied to the chiller. This will allow the
cooler heater to protect the cooler from freezing down to
Apply power to the chiller. Turn ON the option panel –20 °F. Before placing the unit back in service, valves
circuit breaker if supplied. should be opened and power must be switched on (if
power is removed for more than 8 hours) for at least 8
The machine is now live! hours (24 hours if ambient temperature is below 86 °F
[30 °C]) before the unit is restarted.
Flow Switch
Verify a chilled water flow switch is correctly fitted in
Switch Settings the customer’s piping on the cooler outlet, and wired into
the control panel correctly using shielded cable.
Assure the chiller OFF/ON UNIT switch at the bottom
of the keypad is OFF. Place the optional circuit breaker There should be a straight run of at least 5 pipe diameters
handle on the panel door to ON. The customer’s on either side of the flow switch. The flow switch should
disconnection devices can now be set to ON. be connected to terminals 13 and 14 of XTBC1 on the
panel.
Verify the control panel display is illuminated. Assure
the system switches under the SYSTEM SWITCHES Temperature Sensor(s)
Key are in the OFF position.
Ensure the leaving liquid temperature sensor is coated
Compressor Heaters with heat conductive compound (Part No. 013-00890-
000) and is inserted to the bottom of the water outlet
Verify the compressor heaters are energized. If the sensor well in the cooler. This sensor also provides some
ambient temperature is above 96 °F (36 °C) the freeze protection and must always be fully inserted in
compressor heaters must be on for at least 8 hours before the water outlet sensor well.
start-up to ensure all refrigerant liquid is driven out of
the compressor and the oil. If the ambient temperature
is below 86 °F (30 °C), allow 24 hours.
Water System
Verify the chilled liquid system has been installed
correctly, and has been commissioned with the correct
direction of water flow through the cooler. The inlet
should be at the refrigerant piping connection end of
the cooler. Purge air from the top of the cooler using
the plugged air vent mounted on the top of the cooler
body.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
EQUIPMENT PRE-STARTUP & STARTUP CHECKLIST
JOB NAME: ______________________________  7. Check the control panel to ensure it is free of

foreign material (wires, metal chips, etc.).
SALES ORDER #: _________________________
 8. Visually inspect wiring (power and control). Wir-
LOCATION: ______________________________ ing MUST meet N.E.C. and local codes.
SOLD BY:________________________________  9. Check tightness of power wiring inside the power
INSTALLING panel on both sides of the motor contactors and
CONTRACTOR: ___________________________ overloads.
START‑UP  10. Check for proper size fuses in main and control
TECHNICIAN/ circuits, and verify overload setting corresponds
COMPANY: _______________________________ with RLA and FLA values in electrical tables.
 11. Assure 120VAC Control Power to TB1 has 15
START‑UP DATE :_________________________
amp minimum capacity.
 12. Be certain all water temp sensors are inserted
CHILLER MODEL #: _______________________ completely in their respective wells and are coated
SERIAL #: ______________________________ with heat conductive compound.
 13. Assure that evaporator TXV bulbs are strapped
onto the suction lines at 4 or 8 o’clock positions
PRE-STARTUP or suction temperature sensors if EEVs are in-
CHECKING THE SYSTEM stalled.
PRIOR TO INITIAL START (NO POWER)
COMPRESSOR HEATERS 6
Unit Checks (POWER ON – 24 HOURS PRIOR TO START)
 1. Inspect the unit for shipping or installation dam-
age.  1. Apply 120VAC and verify its value between ter-
 2. Assure that all piping has been completed. minals 5 and 2 of XTBC2. The voltage should be
 3. Visually check for refrigerant piping leaks. 120VAC +/- 10%.
 4. Open suction line ball valve, discharge line ball Power must be applied 24 hours prior to
valve, and liquid line valve for each system. start-up.
 5. The compressor oil level should be maintained Each heater should draw approximately 0.5-1A.
so that an oil level is visible or splashing in the
sight glass when fully loaded. At shutdown, the
STARTUP
oil level should be between the bottom and middle
of the oil equalizing sight glass. PANEL CHECKS
 6. Assure water pumps are on. Check and adjust (POWER ON – BOTH UNIT SWITCH OFF)
water pump flow rate and pressure drop across
the cooler (see OPERATIONAL LIMITATIONS).  1. Apply 3-phase power and verify its value. Volt-
Verify flow switch operation. age imbalance should be no more than 2% of
the average voltage.
Excessive flow may cause catastrophic  2. Apply 120VAC and verify its value on the ter-
damage to the heat exchanger (evapo- minal block in the Power Panel. Make the mea-
rator). surement between terminals 5 and 2 of XTBC2.
The voltage should be 120VAC +/‑ 10%.
 3. Program/verify the Cooling Setpoints, Program
Setpoints, and unit Options. Record the values
in Table 7 (see sections on “Setpoints and Unit
Keys” located in this IOM for additional pro-
gramming instruction).

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 7 – SETPOINTS ENTRY LIST The chilled liquid setpoint may need to
OPTIONS be temporarily lowered to ensure all
Display Language compressors cycle “on.”
Sys 1 Switch
Sys 2 Switch
Chilled Liquid
* Ambient Control
Local/Remote Mode
Control Mode
Display Units
* Lead/Lag Control This unit uses scroll compressors
* Fan Control which can only operate in one direc-
Manual Override tion. Failure to observe this will lead
Current Feedback
** Soft Start
to compressor failure.
** Unit Type
** Refrigerant Type
** Expansion Valve Type
COOLING SETPOINTS  6. Turn system 1 “OFF” and system 2 “ON” (refer
Cooling Setpoint to Option 2 under the “Unit Keys” section of this
Range
IOM for more information on system switches).
EMS-PWM Max. Setpoint
PROGRAM
Discharge Pressure Cutout Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the
Suct. Pressure Cutout “ON” position. As each compressor cycles “ON”,
Low Amb. Temp. Cutout
ensure that the discharge pressure rises and the
Leaving Liquid Temp. Cutout
Anti-Recycle Time suction pressure decreases. If this does not oc-
Fan Control On Pressure cur, the compressor being tested is operating in
Fan Differential Off Pressure the reverse direction and must be corrected. After
Total # of Compressors verifying proper compressor rotation, turn the
* Number of Fans/System Unit Switch to “OFF”.
* Unit/Sys Voltage
Unit ID
The chilled liquid setpoint may need to
* NOT ON ALL MODELS be temporarily lowered to ensure all
** VIEWABLE ONLY
compressors cycle “ON”.
 4. Put the unit into Service Mode (as described un-
der the “Service and Troubleshooting” section of
this IOM) and cycle each condenser fan to ensure
proper rotation.
 5. Prior to this step, turn system 2 off (if applicable
refer to Option 2 under the “Unit Keys” sec-
tion of this IOM for more information on system
switches). Connect a manifold gauge to system 1
suction and discharge service valves.
Place the Unit Switch in the control panel to the
“ON” position. As each compressor cycles on,
ensure that the discharge pressure rises and the
suction pressure decreases. If this does not oc-
cur, the compressor being tested is operating in
the reverse direction and must be corrected. After
verifying proper compressor rotation, turn the
Unit Switch to “OFF.”

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
CHECKING SUPERHEAT AND SUBCOOLING Assure that superheat is set at a minimum of 10 °F (5.56
The subcooling temperature of each system can be °C) with a single compressor running on each circuit.
calculated by recording the temperature of the liquid line
at the outlet of the condenser and subtracting it from the  2. Record the suction temperature, suction pressure,
liquid line saturation temperature at the liquid stop valve suction saturation temperature, and superheat of
(liquid line saturation temperature is converted from a each system below:
temperature/pressure chart).
Example: SYS 1 SYS 2
Liquid line pressure = Suction Temp = _______ _______ °F
325 PSIG converted to temp. 101 °F Suction Pressure = _______ _______ PSIG
minus liquid line temp. - 83 °F
Saturation Temp = _______ _______ °F
Subcooling = 18 °F
Superheat = _______ _______ °F
The subcooling should be adjusted to 18 °F at design
LEAK CHECKING
conditions.
 1. Leak check compressors, fittings, and piping to
 1. Record the liquid line pressure and its correspond- ensure no leaks.
ing temperature, liquid line temperature and
subcooling below: If the unit is functioning satisfactorily during the initial
operating period, no safeties trip and the compressors
SYS 1 SYS 2 cycle to control water temperature to setpoint, the chiller
Liq Line Press = _______ _______ PSIG is ready to be placed into operation.
Saturated Temp = _______ _______ °F
Liq Line Temp = _______ _______ °F
Subcooling = _______ _______ °F
6
After the subcooling is verified, the suction superheat
should be checked. The superheat should be checked
only after steady state operation of the chiller has been
established, the leaving water temperature has been pulled
down to the required leaving water temperature, and the
unit is running in a fully loaded condition. The correct
superheat setting for a system is 10 °F – 15 °F (5.56 °C –
8.33 °C) 18" (46 cm) from the heat exchanger.
Superheat should typically be set for no less than 10

°F with only a single compressor running on a circuit.
The superheat is calculated as the difference between the
actual temperature of the returned refrigerant gas in the
suction line entering the compressor and the temperature
corresponding to the suction pressure as shown in a
standard pressure/temperature chart.
Example:
Suction Temp = 46 °F
minus Suction Press
105 PSIG converted to Temp - 34 °F
Superheat = 12 °F
When adjusting the expansion valve (TXV only), the

adjusting screw should be turned not more than one
turn at a time, allowing sufficient time (approximately
15 minutes) between adjustments for the system and the
thermal expansion valve to respond and stabilize.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
UNIT OPERATING SEQUENCE

The operating sequence described below relates to 4. Several seconds after the compressor starts, the
operation on a hot water start after power has been systems first condenser fan will be cycled on
applied, such as start-up commissioning. When a (outdoor air temperature greater than 25 °F (-4
compressor starts, internal timers limit the minimum °C) or discharge pressure). See the “Operating
time before another compressor can start to one Controls” section of this IOM for details concern-
minute. ing condenser fan cycling.
1. For the chiller system to run, the flow switch must

be closed, any remote cycling contacts must be 5. After one minute of compressor run time, the
closed, the daily schedule must not be scheduling next compressor in sequence will start when a
the chiller off, and temperature demand must be system has to load. Additional compressors will be
present. started at 60 second intervals as needed to satisfy
temperature setpoint.
2. When power is applied to the system, the micro-

processor will start a two minute timer. This is the 6. If demand requires, the lag system will cycle
same timer that prevents an instantaneous start after on with the same timing sequences as the lead
a power failure. system, after the lead system has run for five min-
utes. Refer to the “Capacity Control” section of
this IOM for a detailed explanation of system and
3. At the end of the two minute timer, the microproces- compressor staging.
sor will check for cooling demand. If all conditions
allow for start, a compressor on the lead system
will start and the liquid line solenoid will open. 7. As the load decreases below setpoint, the compres-
Coincident with the start, the anti-coincident timer sors will be shut down in sequence. This will occur
will be set and begin counting downward from “60” at intervals of either 60, 30, or 20 seconds based
seconds to “0” seconds. on water temperature as compared to setpoint, and
control mode. See the “Capacity Control” section
of this IOM for a detailed explanation.
If the unit is programmed for Auto Lead/Lag, the
system with the shortest average run-time of the
compressors will be assigned as the “lead” system. 8. When the last compressor in a “system” (two or
A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever all three compressors per system), is to be cycled
systems shutdown. off, the system will initiate a pump-down. Each
“system” has a pump-down feature upon shut-off.
On a non-safety, non-unit switch shutdown, the
LLSV will be turned off and the last compressor
will be allowed to run until the suction pressure
falls below the suction pressure cutout or for 180
seconds, whichever comes first.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS

YORK MILLENNIUM CONTROL CENTER
LD13283
INTRODUCTION IPU II and I/O Boards
The YORK MicroComputer Control Center is a The IPU II and I/O boards are assembled to function as a
microprocessor based control system designed to provide single microprocessor controller requiring no additional
the entire control for the liquid chiller. The control logic hardware. The IPU II board contains a coldfire
embedded in the microprocessor based control system microprocessor and is the controller and decision
will provide control for the chilled liquid temperatures, maker in the control panel. The I/O board handles all
as well as sequencing, system safeties, displaying status, of the chiller I/O (Inputs and Outputs). System inputs
and daily schedules. The MicroComputer Control Center from pressure transducers and temperature sensors are
consists of four basic components: connected to the I/O board. The I/O board contains a
• IPU II & I/O Boards processor capable of reading the inputs and controlling
the outputs. It communicates through the transition
• Transformer
• Display
header with the IPU II microprocessor. 7
• Keypad. The I/O board circuitry multiplexes the analog inputs,
digitizes them, and constantly scans them to keep watch
The keypad allows programming and accessing setpoints, on the chiller operating conditions. The input values are
pressures, temperatures, cutouts, daily schedule, options, transmitted serially to the IPU II microprocessor board.
and fault information. From this information, the IPU II then issues commands
to the I/O board relay outputs to control contactors,
Remote cycling, demand limiting and chilled liquid solenoids, etc. for Chilled Liquid Temperature Control
temperature reset can be accomplished by field supplied and to react to safety conditions. The I/O board
contacts. converts logic signals to operate relay outputs to 115
VAC levels used by motor contactors, fan contactors,
Compressor starting/stopping and loading/unloading solenoid valves, etc. to control system operation. The
decisions are performed by the microprocessor to low voltage side of all relay coils on the I/O board are
maintain leaving or return chilled liquid temperature. powered by +12V.
These decisions are a function of temperature deviation
from setpoint. Keypad commands are actuated upon by the
microprocessor to change setpoints, cutouts, scheduling,
A master ON/Off switch is available to activate or operating requirements, and to provide displays. The
deactivate the unit. keypad and display are connected to the I/O board.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
The on-board power supply converts 24VAC from Display messages may show characters indicating
75VA, 120/24 VAC 50/60Hz UL listed class 2 power “greater than” (>) or “less than” (<). These characters
transformer to +12V, +5V and +3.3V using switching indicate the actual values are greater than or less than
and linear voltage regulators located on the I/O and the limit values which are being displayed.
IPU II boards. These voltages are used to operate
integrated circuitry on the board. The 40 character Keypad
display and unit sensors (transducers and temperature The 12 button non-tactile keypad allows the user
sensors) are supplied power for the microprocessor to retrieve vitals system parameters such as system
board +5V supply. 24VAC is rectified, but not regulated, pressures, temperatures, compressor running times
to provide unregulated +30 VDC to supply all of the and starts, option information on the chiller, and
digital inputs. system setpoints. This data is useful for monitoring
chiller operation, diagnosing potential problems,
The IPU II board contains one green “Power” LED troubleshooting, and commissioning the chiller.
to indicate that the board is powered up and one red
“Status” LED to indicate, by blinking, that the processor It is essential the user become familiar with using the
is operating. keypad and display. This will allow the user to make full
use of the capabilities and diagnostic features available.
The I/O board contains one green “Power” LED to
indicate that the board is powered up and one red Battery Back-up
“Status” LED to indicate by blinking that the processor
is operating. The I/O board also contains two sets of The IPU II contains a Real Time Clock integrated circuit
Receiver/Transmit LED’s, one for each available serial chip with an internal battery backup. The purpose of
communication port. The receive LED’s are green, and this battery backup is to assure any programmed values
the Transmit LED’s are red. (setpoints, clock, cutouts, etc.) are not lost during a
power failure regardless of the time involved in a power
A jumper on the I/O board selects 4-20mA or 0-10 cut or shutdown period.
VDC as the input type on the remote temperature reset
analog input. Transformer
A 75VA, 120/24VAC 50/60Hz transformer is provided
Unit Switch to supply power to the Microprocessor Board, which in
A unit ON/OFF switch is located below the keypad. turn rectifies, filters, and regulates as necessary to supply
This switch allows the operator to turn the entire unit power to the display, sensors, and transducers.
“OFF” if desired. The switch must be placed in the “ON”
position in order for the chiller to operate. Programming # of Compressors
Display The total number of compressors is programmable under

the Program Key. Dual (two) system chillers can have
The 40 character liquid crystal display (2 lines of 20 4, 5, or 6 compressors.
characters) is used for displaying system parameters
and operator messages.
The display in conjunction with the keypad, allows the

operator to view system operating parameters as well
as access programmed information already in memory.
The display has a lighted background for night viewing
and for viewing in direct sunlight.
When a key is pressed, such as the OPER DATA key,

system parameters will be displayed and will remain
on the display until another key is pressed. The system
parameters can be scrolled with the use of the ↑ (UP)
and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys. The display will update all
information at a rate of about 1 per second.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
“STATUS” KEY
00066VIP
Unit Status D A I L Y S C H E D U L E
Pressing the STATUS key will enable the operator to S H U T D O W N
determine current chiller operating status. The messages
displayed will include running status, cooling demand,
fault status, external cycling device status. The display The DAILY SCHEDULE SHUTDOWN message
will be a single message relating to the highest priority indicates that the daily/holiday schedule program is
message as determined by the microprocessor board. preventing the unit from running.
Status messages fall into the categories of General Status
REMOTE STOP
and Fault Status.
NO RUN PERM
The following General, Safety, and Warning messages

are displayed when the STATUS key is pressed. REMOTE STOP NO RUN PERM shows that a remote
Following each displayed message is an explanation start/stop contact is open in series with the flow switch.
pertaining to that particular message. These contacts are connected to Terminals 51 & 13 of 7
XTBC1. A 3-second delay is built into the software to
General Status Messages
prevent nuisance shutdowns due to erroneous signals
In the case of messages which apply to individual on the run permissive input.
systems, SYS 1 and SYS 2 messages will both be
displayed and may be different. In the case of single FLOW SWITCH
system units, all SYS 2 messages will be blank. OPEN
U N I T S W I T C H O F F
S H U T D O W N FLOW SWITCH OPEN indicates the flow switch
contacts connected to Terminals 13 and 14 of XTBC1
This message informs the operator that the UNIT switch are open. A 3-second delay is built into software to
on the control panel is in the OFF position which will prevent nuisance shutdowns due to erroneous signals
not allow the unit to run. from the flow switch.
R E M O T E C O N T R O L L E D
S Y S 1 S Y S S W I T C H O F F
S H U T D O W N
S Y S 2 S Y S S W I T C H O F F
The REMOTE CONTROLLED SHUTDOWN message

indicates that either an ISN system or RCC has turned SYS SWITCH OFF indicates that the system switch
the unit “OFF”, not allowing it to run. under OPTIONS is turned “OFF”. The system will not
be allowed to run until the switch is turned back on.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
S Y S 1 N O C O O L L O A D The limiting pressure is a factory set limit to keep the

S Y S 2 N O C O O L L O A D system from faulting on the high discharge pressure
cutout due to high load or pull down conditions. When
the unload point is reached, the microprocessor board
This message informs the operator that the chilled will automatically unload the affected system by de-
liquid temperature is below the point (determined by energizing one compressor. The discharge pressure
the setpoint and control range) that the microprocessor unload will occur when the discharge pressure gets
board will bring on a system or that the microprocessor within 10 PSIG (0.69 barg) of the programmed discharge
board has not loaded the lead system far enough into pressure cutout. This will only happen if the system is
the loading sequence to be ready to bring the lag system fully loaded and will shut only one compressor off. If
“ON”. The lag system will display this message until the the system is not fully loaded, discharge limiting will
loading sequence is ready for the lag system to start. not go into effect. Reloading the affected system will
occur when the discharge pressure drops to 85% of the
S Y S 1 C O M P S R U N X unload pressure and 10 minutes have elapsed.
S Y S 2 C O M P S R U N X
S Y S 1 S U C T L I M I T I N G
The COMPS RUNNING message indicates that the S Y S 2 S U C T L I M I T I N G
respective system is running due to demand. The “X”
will be replaced with the number of compressors in that When this message appears, suction pressure limiting is
system that are running. in effect. The suction pressure limit is a control point that
limits the loading of a system when the suction pressure
S Y S 1 A R T I M E R X X S drops to within 15% above the suction pressure cutout.
S Y S 2 A R T I M E R X X S On a standard system programmed for 44 PSIG/3.0 Bar
suction pressure cutout, the microprocessor board would
The anti-recycle timer message shows the amount of inhibit loading of the affected system with the suction
time left on the respective systems anti-recycle timer. pressure less than or equal to 1.15 x 44 PSIG/3.0 Bar
This message is displayed when the system is unable to = 50 PSIG/3.5 Bar. The system will be allowed to load
start due the anti-recycle timer being active. after 60 seconds and after the suction pressure rises
above the suction pressure load limit point.
S Y S 1 A C T I M E R X X S
S Y S 2 A C T I M E R X X S S Y S 1 L O A D L I M I T X X %
S Y S 2 L O A D L I M I T X X %
The anti-coincidence timer is a software feature that
guards against two systems starting simultaneously. This message indicates that load limiting is in effect and
This assures instantaneous starting current does not the percentage of the limiting in effect. This limiting
become excessively high due to simultaneous starts. could be due to the load limit/pwm input, ISN or RCC
The microprocessor board limits the time between controller sending a load limit command.
compressor starts to one minute regardless of demand
M
A N
U A L
or the anti-recycle timer being timed out. The anti-
O V
E R
R I D E
coincidence timer is only present on two system units.
S Y S 1 D S C H L I M I T I N G
If MANUAL OVERRIDE mode is selected, the STATUS
S Y S 2 D S C H L I M I T I N G
display will show this message. This will indicate that
the Daily Schedule is being ignored and the chiller
will start-up when chilled liquid temperature allows
When this message appears, discharge pressure limiting
(Remote Contacts, UNIT switch and SYSTEM switches
is in effect. The Discharge Pressure Limiting feature
permitting). This is a priority message and cannot be
is integral to the standard software control; however
overridden by anti-recycle messages, fault messages, etc.
the discharge transducer is optional on some models.
when in the STATUS display mode. Therefore, do not
Therefore, it is important to keep in mind that this
expect to see any other STATUS messages when in the
control will not function unless the discharge transducer
MANUAL OVERRIDE mode. MANUAL OVERRIDE
is installed in the system.
is only to be used in emergencies or for servicing. Manual
override mode automatically disables itself after 30
minutes.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
S Y S 1 P U M P I N G D O W N S Y S 1 L O W S U C T P R E S S
S Y S 2 P U M P I N G D O W N S Y S 2 L O W S U C T P R E S S
The PUMPING DOWN message indicates that a The Suction Pressure Cutout is a software cutout that
compressor in the respective system is presently in the helps protect the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up
process of pumping the system down. When pumpdown should the system attempt to run with a low refrigerant
is initiated on shutdown, the liquid line solenoid or EEV charge or a restriction in the refrigerant circuit.
will close and a compressor will continue to run. When
the suction pressure decreases to the suction pressure Repeated starts after resetting a low
cutout setpoint or runs for 180 seconds, whichever suction pressure fault will cause evapo-
comes first, the compressor will cycle off. rator freeze-up. Whenever a system
locks out on this safety or any safety,
Fault Safety Status Messages
immediate steps should be taken to
Safety Status messages appear when safety thresholds identify the cause.
in the unit have been exceeded. Safeties are divided
into two categories – system safeties and unit safeties. At system start, the cutout is set to 10% of programmed
System safeties are faults that cause the individual value. During the next 3 minutes the cutout point is
system to be shut down. Unit safeties are faults that cause ramped up to the programmed cutout point. If at any time
all running compressors to be shut down. The following during this 3 minutes the suction pressure falls below the
are display messages and explanations. ramped cutout point, the system will stop. This cutout is
completely ignored for the first 30 seconds of system run
System Safeties time to avoid nuisance shutdowns, especially on units
System safeties are faults that cause individual systems that utilize a low pressure switch in place of the suction
to be shut down if a safety threshold is exceeded for 3 pressure transducer.
seconds. These are auto reset faults in that the system
will be allowed to restart automatically after the fault After the first 3 minutes, if the suction pressure falls
condition is no longer present. However, if 3 faults on the below the programmed cutout setting, a “transient
same system occur within 90 minutes, that system will protection routine” is activated. This sets the cutout at
be locked out on the last fault. This condition requires a 10% of the programmed value and ramps up the cutout 7
manual reset. The system switch (under the OPTIONS over the next 30 seconds. If at any time during this 30
key) must be turned off and then back on to clear the seconds the suction pressure falls below the ramped
lockout fault. Fault messages will be displayed whenever cutout, the system will stop.
a system is locked out.
S Y S 1 M P / H P C O F A U L T
S Y S 1 H I G H D S C H P R E S S Y S 2 M P / H P C O F A U L T
S Y S 2 H I G H D S C H P R E S
The Discharge Pressure Cutout is a software cutout in S Y S 1 M P / H P C O I N H I B

the microprocessor and is backed-up by a mechanical S Y S 2 M P / H P C O I N H I B
high pressure cutout switch located in the refrigerant
circuit. It assures that the system pressure does not The Motor Protector/Mechanical High Pressure Cutout
exceed safe working limits. The system will shutdown protects the compressor motor from overheating or the
when the programmable cutout is exceeded and will be system from experiencing dangerously high discharge
allowed to restart when the discharge pressure falls 40 pressure.
PSIG below the cutout. Discharge transducers must be
installed for this function to operate. This fault condition is present when CR1 (SYS 1) or
CR2 (SYS 2) relays de-energize due to the HP switch
or motor protector opening. This causes the respective
CR contacts to open causing 0VDC to be read on the
inputs to the microboard. The fault condition is cleared
when a 30VDC signal is restored to the input.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
The internal motor protector opens at 185 °F – 248 °F During the 30 minute timeout, the MP/HPCO INHIB
(85 °C – 120 °C) and auto resets. The mechanical HP message will be displayed. The MP/HPCO fault will
switch opens at 585 PSIG +/- 10 PSIG (27.92 barg +/- .69 only be displayed after 3 shutdowns in 90 minutes,
barg) and closes at 330 PSIG +/- 25 PSIG (22.75 barg indicating the system is locked out and will not
+/- 1.72 barg). restart.
S Y S 1 H I G H M T R C U R R
The compressor is also equipped with a discharge
S Y S 2 H
I G H M T R C U R R
temperature sensor for the purpose of sensing internal
scroll temperature. This sensor protects the scrolls
from overheating due to inadequate cooling that may When the System Current Feedback option is installed
occur when refrigerant charge is low or superheat is and selected (Option 11 under OPTIONS Key Current
too high. Feedback), this safety will operate as follows. If the
actual feedback voltage of the system, proportional to
When the sensor indicates a high temperature, it opens currents, exceeds the programmed trip voltage for 5
the motor protector circuit in the compressor causing seconds, the system will shutdown.
the compressor to shut down.
This safety will shut down a system if either suction
During the first two faults an MP/HP INHIBIT message temperature or suction pressure sensors read out of
will be displayed and the system will not be locked out. range high or low. This condition must be present for 3
Only after the third fault in 90 minutes will the MP/ seconds to cause a system shutdown. The safety locks
HPCO FAULT message be displayed. out a system after the first fault and will not allow
automatic restarting.
Whenever the motor protector or discharge sensor
shuts down a compressor and the system, the internal
compressor contacts will open for a period of 30 minutes
to assure that the motor or scroll temperatures have
time to dissipate the heat and cool down. The MP/
HP INHIBIT message will be displayed while these
contacts are open or when the HPCO is open. While
this message is displayed, the compressors will not be
permitted to start.
After 30 minutes, the contacts will close and the system

will be permitted to restart. The microprocessor board
will not try to restart the compressors in a system that
shuts down on this safety for a period of 30 minutes to
allow the internal compressor to time out.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Unit Safeties U N I T F A U L T :
Unit safeties are faults that cause all running compressors H I G H M T R C U R R
to be shut down. Unit faults are auto reset faults in that
the unit will be allowed to restart automatically after the When the CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT
fault condition is no longer present. option is selected under the OPTIONS Key, the unit will
shut down when the voltage exceeds the programmed
U N I T F A U L T : trip voltage for 5 seconds.
L O W A M B I E N T T E M P
The trip voltage is programmed at the factory according
The Low Ambient Temp Cutout is a safety shutdown to compressor or unit Running load Amps (RLA).
designed to protect the chiller from operating in a low
ambient condition. If the outdoor ambient temperature Restart will occur after the anti-recycle timer times
falls below the programmable cutout, the chiller will out.
shut down. Restart can occur when temperature rises 2
°F above the cutoff. Unit Warning
The following messages are not unit safeties and will not
U N I T F A U L T : be logged to the history buffer. They are unit warnings
L O W L I Q U I D T E M P and will not auto-restart. Operator intervention is
required to allow a restart of the chiller.
The Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout protects
! ! L O W B A T T E R Y ! !
the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up should the
C H E C K P R O G / S E T P / O P T N
chilled liquid temperature drop below the freeze point.
This situation could occur under low flow conditions
or if the micropanel setpoint values are improperly The Low Battery Warning can only occur at unit
programmed. Anytime the leaving chilled liquid power-up. On micropanel power-up, the RTC battery
temperature (water or glycol) drops below the cutout is checked. If a low battery is found, all programmed
point, the chiller will shutdown. Restart can occur when setpoints, program values, options, time, schedule, and
chilled liquid temperature rises 2 °F above the cutout. history buffers will be lost. These values will all be reset
to their default values which may not be the desired
U N I T F A U L T : operating values. Once a faulty battery is detected, 7
1 1 5 V A C U N D E R V O L T A G E the unit will be prevented from running until the
PROGRAM key is pressed. Once PROGRAM is pressed
The Under Voltage Safety assures that the system is the anti-recycle timers will be set to the programmed
not operated at voltages where malfunction of the anti-recycle time to allow the operator time to check
microprocessor could result in system damage. When the setpoints, and if necessary, reprogram programmable
115VAC to the micropanel drops below a certain level, a values and options.
unit fault is initiated to safely shut down the unit. Restart
is allowed after the unit is fully powered again and the If a low battery is detected, it should be replaced as
anti-recycle timers have finished counting down. soon as possible. The programmed values will all be lost
and the unit will be prevented from running on the next
power interruption. The RTC/battery (031-02565-000)
is located at U5 on the microboard.
I N C O R R E C T
U N I T T Y P E
This indicates the condensing unit jumper is installed

between J11-12 and J11-7. This jumper must be
removed to operate the chiller.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
STATUS KEY MESSAGES

TABLE 8 – STATUS KEY MESSAGES QUICK REFERENCE LIST
STATUS KEY MESSAGES
General Messages Fault Messages
Unit Switch Off System Safeties Unit Safeties &

Shutdown Warning Messages
Remote Controlled System X High Disch Pressure Low Ambient Temp

Shutdown
Daily Schedule System X Low Suct Pressure Low Liquid Temp

Shutdown
Rem Stop
No Run Permissive System X MP/HPCO Inhibit 115VAC Undervoltage
Flow Switch
Open
Low Battery
System X MP/HPCO Fault
Check Prog/Step/Optn
System X Switch Off (Unit Warning Message)
System X System X HIGH MTR CURR

No Cooling load (Optional) Incorrect Unit Type
(Unit Warning Message)
System X Comps Run
System X AR Timer
High Motor Current
System X AC Timer
System X Disch Limiting
System X Suction Limiting
System X Percentage Load Limiting

LD11297B
Manual Overide Status
System X Pumping Down (on shutdown)

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
DISPLAY/PRINT KEYS
00067VIP
The DISPLAY/PRINT keys allow the user to retrieve With the “UNIT TYPE” set as a liquid chiller (no jumper
system and unit information that is useful for monitoring from J11-7 to J11-12 on the I/O Board), the following
chiller operation, diagnosing potential problems, list of operating data screens are viewable under the
troubleshooting, and commissioning the chiller. OPER DATA key in the order that they are displayed.
The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through the displays
System and unit information, unit options, setpoints, in the order they appear below:
and scheduling can also be printed out with the use of
a printer. Both real-time and history information are
7
The chiller MUST be set to be a liquid
available. chiller (no jumper from J11-7 to J11-
12 on the I/O Board). DO NOT oper-
Oper Data Key ate the chiller if not properly set up.
The OPER DATA key gives the user access to unit and
system operating parameters. When the OPER DATA
key is pressed, system parameters will be displayed and
L C H L T = 4 6 . 2 ° F
remain on the display until another key is pressed. After
R C H L T = 5 7 . 4 ° F °
pressing the OPER DATA key, the various operating data
screens can be scrolled through by using the ↑ (UP) and
↓ (DOWN) arrow keys or the ENTER/ADV key located This display shows chilled leaving and return liquid
under the “ENTRY” section. temperatures. The minimum limit on the display for
these parameters are 2.2 °F (-19 °C). The maximum
limit on the display is 140 °F (60 °C).
System 2 information will only be dis-
played for 2 system units.
A M B I E N T A I R T E M P
= 8 7 . 5 ° F
This display shows the ambient air temperature. The

minimum limit on the display is 0.4 °F (-17.6 °C). The
maximum limit on the display is 131.2 °F (55.1 °C).

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
S Y S X S P = 7 2 . 1 P S I G C O O L I N G D E M A N D
D P = 2 2 7 . 0 P
S I G 2 O F 8 S T E P S
These displays show suction and discharge pressures The display COOLING DEMAND indicates the current
for each system. The discharge pressure transducer is “step” in the capacity control scheme when in Return
optional on some models. Water Control Mode. The number of available steps
are determined by how many compressors are in the
If the optional discharge transducer is not installed, the unit. In the above display, the “2” does not mean that
discharge pressure would display 0 PSIG (0 barg). two compressor are running but only indicates that the
capacity control scheme is on step 2 of 8. Capacity
The minimum limits for the display are: Control is covered in more detail in this publication
Suction Pressure: 0 PSIG (0 barg) which provides specific information on compressor
Discharge Pressure: 0 PSIG (0 barg)
staging (for Return Water Control only).
The maximum limits for the display are:
Suction Pressure: 400 PSIG (27.58 barg) T E M P E R R O R X X X . X ° F
Discharge Pressure: 650 PSIG (44.82 barg) T E M P R A T E X X X . X ° F / M
S Y S X H O U R S 1 = X X X X X
2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X The COOLING DEMAND message will be replaced
with this message when Leaving Chilled liquid control
S Y S X S T A R T S 1 = X X X X X is selected. This message indicates the temperature
2 = X X X X X, 3 = X X X X X error and the rate of change of the chilled liquid
temperature.
The above two messages will appear sequentially for
L E A D S Y S T E M I S
each system. The first display shows accumulated
S Y S T E M N U M B E R 2
running hours of each compressor for the specific
system. The second message shows the number of starts
for each compressor on each system. This display indicates the current LEAD system. In this
example system 2 is the LEAD system, making system
Run times and starts will only be dis- 1 the LAG system. The LEAD system can be manually
selected or automatic. Refer to the programming under
played for the actual number of sys-
the “OPTIONS” key. The Lead System display will only
tems and compressors on the unit.
appear on a two system unit.
A unit utilizing hot gas bypass should

A total of 99,999 hours and starts can be logged before be programmed for MANUAL with
the counter rolls over to “0”. system 1 as the lead system. Failure
to do so will prevent hot gas operation
L O A D T I M E R 5 8 S E C if system 2 switches to the lead system
U N L O A D T I M E R 0 S E C when programmed for AUTOMATIC
LEAD/LAG.
This display of the load and unload timers indicate
the time in seconds until the unit can load or unload.
Whether the systems loads or unloads is determined by
how far the actual liquid temperature is from setpoint.
A detailed description of unit loading and unloading is
covered under the Capacity Control topic.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
E V A P O R A T O R H E A T E R * R e f e r t o t h e s e c t i o n o n O P E R AT I N G
S T A T U S I S = X
X X CONTROLS.
This display indicates the status of the evaporator If the microprocessor board is programmed for
heater. The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER UNIT under the
air temperature. When the ambient temperature drops OPTIONS Key, the display will show up as the first
below 40 °F (4.4 °C) the heater is turned on. When display prior to the SYS 1 displays. Total chiller current
the temperature rises above 45 °F (7.2 °C) the heater is displayed as shown below:
is turned off. An under voltage condition will keep the
heater off until full voltage is restored to the system. U N I T A M P S = 5 4 . 0
V O L T S = 1 . 2
E V
A P
O R
A T
O R W A T
E R
P U
M P S T A T
U S = X
X X
X
If the microprocessor board is programmed for
The evaporator pump dry contacts are energized when CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE, no current display
any compressor is running, will appear.
or
S Y S X C O M P S T A T U S
the unit is not OFF on the daily schedule and the unit
1 = X X X 2 = X X X 3 = X X X
switch is on,
or
the unit has shutdown on a Low Leaving Chilled Liquid S Y S X R U N T I M E
fault. X X - X X - X X - X X D - H - M - S
However, even if one of above is true, the pump will not S Y S X L L S V I S O N

run if the micropanel has been powered up for less than H O T G A S S O L I S O F F
30 seconds or if the pump has run in the last 30 seconds
to prevent pump motor overheating.
S Y S X F A N S T A G E 3

E V A P P U M P T O T A L R U N
H O U R S = X X X X X
S Y S X A M P S = 3 6 . 0
The Evaporator Pump Total Run Hours display indicates V O L T S = 0 . 8 7
the total pump run hours. Total hours continually
increments similar to Compressor Run Hours. If dual
The preceding five messages will appear sequentially,
pumps are fitted, run hours indicates total hours on both
first for system 1, then for system 2.
pumps.
The first message indicates the system and the associated
A C T I V E R E M O T E C T R L
compressors which are running.
N O N E
The second message indicates the system run time in

There are several types of remote systems that can days – hours – minutes – seconds. Please note that this
be used to control or monitor the unit. The following is not accumulated run time but pertains only to the
messages indicate the type of remote control mode current system cycle.
active:
The third message indicates the system, and whether the
NONE – no remote control is active. Remote monitoring liquid line solenoid or EEV pilot solenoid and hot gas
may be via ISN. solenoid are being turned on by the microboard. Please
note that hot gas is not available for system 2, so there
ISN – YORK Talk via ISN allows remote load limiting is no message pertaining to the hot gas solenoid when
and temperature reset through an ISN system. system 2 message is displayed.
LOAD LIM – L oad limiting enabled using contact The fourth message indicates the stage of condenser fan
closure. operation that is active.
PWM TEMP – EMS temperature reset

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
See the “Condenser Fan Control” section in the “Unit TABLE 9 – OPERATION DATA
Operation” section of this IOM for more information.
Oper Data Key
The fifth message displays current as sensed by the
optional current feedback circuitry. The display reads
out in amps along with the DC feedback voltage from Leaving & Chilled Liquid Temps
the module. Current is calculated by:
Ambient Air Temperature
225A x Actual Volts
5 Volts System 1 Discharge & Suction Pressure
Individual displays will be present for each system, *System X Accumulated Hours
if CURRENT FEEDBACK ONE PER SYSTEM is
programmed under the OPTIONS key. Combined *System X Accumulated Starts
compressor current for each system is displayed.
Load and Unload Timers
Oper Data Quick Reference List
Cooling Demand Steps
The following table is a quick reference list for (Return Chilled Liquid Control Only)
information available under the OPER DATA key.
Temp Rate & Temp Error
(Leaving Chilled Liquid Control Only)
Lead System Indicator
Evaporator Heater Status
Evaporator Water Pump Status
Active Remote Control
Current Feedback One Per Unit
*System X Compressors Status
*System X Run Time
* Sys X LLSV & HGSV Status
*System X Condenser Fan Stage
Current Feedback One Per System
* Block of information repeats for each system LD12585

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Print Key
The PRINT key allows the operator to obtain a printout UNIT DATA
RETURN LIQUID TEMP 58.2 DEGF
of real-time system operating data or a history printout LEAVING LIQUID TEMP 53.0 DEGF
of system data at the “instant of the fault” on the last six DISCHARGE AIR TEMP 55.3 DEGF
faults which occurred on the unit. An optional printer is COOLING RANGE 42.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF
HEATING RANGE 122.0 +/- 2.0 DEGF
required for the printout. SYS 1 SETPOINT 70 +/- 3 PSIG
SYS 2 SETPOINT 70 +/- 3 PSIG
Operating Data Printout REMOTE SETPOINT 44.0 DEGF
AMBIENT AIR TEMP 74.8 DEGF
Pressing the PRINT key and then OPER DATA key LEAD SYSTEM SYS 2
allows the operator to obtain a printout of current system EVAPORATOR PUMP ON
EVAPORATOR HEATER OFF
operating parameters. When the OPER DATA key is ACTIVE REMOTE CONTROL NONE
pressed, a snapshot will be taken of system operating LAST DEFROST SYS X DURATION XXXS
conditions and panel programming selections. This data TIME TO SYS X DEFROST XX MIN
BIVALENT DELAY REMAINING XX MIN
will be temporarily stored in memory and transmission UNIT XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
of this data will begin to the printer. A sample Operating SOFTWARE VERSION C.M02.13.00
Data printout is shown below. (Note: Not all values are
SYSTEM 1 DATA
printed for all models.) COMP STATUS 1=OFF 2=OFF 3=OFF
RUN TIME 0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S
TIME YYYYYYY 0- 0- 0- 0 D-H-M-S
LAST STATE YYYYYYY
YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION SUCTION PRESSURE 105 PSIG
MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER DISCHARGE PRESSURE 315 PSIG
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 46.0 DEGF
UNIT STATUS SAT SUCTION TEMP 34.0 DEGF
2:04PM 01 AUG 09 SUCTION SUPERHEAT 12.0 DEGF
COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF
SYS 1 NO COOLING LOAD DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF
SYS 2 COMPRESSORS RUNNING 2 LIQUID LINE SOLENOID OFF
MODE SOLENOID OFF
OPTIONS HOT GAS BYPASS VALVE OFF
CHILLED LIQUID WATER CONDENSER FAN STAGE OFF
AMBIENT CONTROL STANDARD EEV OUTPUT 0.0 %
LOCAL/REMOTE MODE
CONTROL MODE
REMOTE
LEAVING LIQUID
SYSTEM XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS 7
LEAD/LAG CONTROL AUTOMATIC SYSTEM 2 DATA
FAN CONTROL AMB & DSCH PRESS COMP STATUS 1=ON, 2=OFF, 3=ON
CURRENT FEEDBACK NONE RUN TIME 0-0-1-46 D-H-M-S
POWER FAILURE RESTART AUTOMATIC TIME YYYYYYY 0-0-0-0 D-H-M-S
SOFT START ENABLED LAST STATE YYYYYYY
EXPANSION VALVE THERMOSTATIC SUCTION PRESSURE 110 PSIG
REMOTE TEMP RESET 4 TO 20 MA DISCHARGE PRESSURE 320 PSIG
SUCTION TEMPERATURE 49.3 DEGF
PROGRAM VALUES SAT SUCTION TEMP 36.0 DEGF
DSCH PRESS CUTOUT 570 PSIG SUCTION SUPERHEAT 13.3 DEGF
SUCT PRESS CUTOUT 80 PSIG COOLER INLET REFRIG 31.6 DEGF
SUCT PRESS CUT COOLING 42 PSIG DEFROST TEMPERATURE 52.8 DEGF
SUCT PRESS CUT HEATING 31 PSIG LIQUID LINE SOLENOID ON
LOW AMBIENT CUTOUT 25.0 DEGF MODE SOLENOID ON
LEAVING LIQUID CUTOUT 25.0 DEGF CONDENSER FAN STAGE 3
ANTI RECYCLE TIME 600 SECS EEV OUTPUT 63.2%
FAN CONTROL ON PRESS 425 PSIG SYSTEM XXX.X AMPS X.X VOLTS
FAN DIFF OFF PRESS 125 PSIG
NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS 6 DAILY SCHEDULE
NUMBER OF FANS PER SYSTEM 4 S M T W T F S *=HOLIDAY
UNIT TRIP VOLTS 3.0 SUN START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
REFRIGERANT TYPE R-22 MON START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
DEFROST INIT TEMP 41.0 DEGF TUE START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
DEFROST INITIATION TIME 60MIN WED START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
DEFROST TERMINATION TIME 3MIN THU START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
BIVALENT HEAT DELAY TIME 30 MIN FRI START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
REMOTE UNIT ID PROGRAMMED 2 SAT START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS 1 (410a) HOL START=00:00AM STOP=00:00AM
PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS XXXXX (410a)

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
See the “Service And Troubleshooting” History Displays

section of this IOM for Printer Installa- The HISTORY key gives the user access to many unit
tion information. and system operating parameters at the time of a unit
or system safety shutdown. When the HISTORY key is
pressed the following message is displayed.
History Printout D I S P L A Y S A F E T Y S H U T-
Pressing the PRINT key and then the HISTORY key D O W N N O . 1 ( 1 T O 9 )
allows the operator to obtain a printout of information
relating to the last 9 Safety Shutdowns which occurred. While this message is displayed, the ↑ (UP) arrow key
The information is stored at the instant of the fault, can be used to select any of the six history buffers. Buffer
regardless of whether the fault caused a lockout to number 1 is the most recent, and buffer number 6 is the
occur. The information is also not affected by power oldest safety shutdown that was saved.
failures (long-term internal memory battery backup
is built into the circuit board) or manual resetting of a After selecting the shutdown number, pressing the
fault lock-out. ENTER key displays the following message which
shows when the shutdown occurred.
When the HISTORY key is pressed, a printout is
transmitted of all system operating conditions which S H U T D O W N O C C U R R E D
were stored at the “instant the fault occurred” for each of 0 3 : 5 6 P M 2 9 J A N 0 2
the 9 Safety Shutdowns buffers. The printout will begin
with the most recent fault which occurred. The most
recent fault will always be stored as Safety Shutdown The ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to scroll
No. 1. identically formatted fault information will then forward and backward through the history buffer to
be printed for the remaining safety shutdowns. display the shutdown conditions stored at the instant the
fault occurred. The ↓ (DOWN) arrow key scrolls through
Information contained in the Safety Shutdown buffers is the displays in the order they appear below:
very important when attempting to troubleshoot a system U N I T F A U L T :
problem. This data reflects the system conditions at the L O W L I Q U I D T E M P
instant the fault occurred and often reveals other system
conditions which actually caused the safety threshold Displays the type of fault that occurred.
to be exceeded. U N I T T Y P E
L I Q U I D C H I L L E R
The history printout is similar to the operational data
printout shown in the previous section. The differences Displays the type of chiller; Liquid, Condensing Unit
are in the header and the schedule information. The daily or Heat Pump.
schedule is not printed in a history print.
C H I L L E D L I Q U I D
X X X X X
The following is one example of a history buffer printout.
The data part of the printout will be exactly the same as
the operational data print so it is not repeated here. The Displays the chilled liquid type; Water or Glycol.
difference is that the Daily Schedule is not printed in the
A M B I E N T C O N T R O L
history print and the header will be as follows.
X X X X X X X X X X
YORK INTERNATIONAL CORPORATION

Displays the type of Ambient Control; Standard or Low
MILLENNIUM LIQUID CHILLER
Ambient.
SAFETY SHUTDOWN NUMBER 1
SHUTDOWN @ 3:56PM 01 AUG 09 L O C A L / R E M O T E M O D E
X X X X X X X X X
SYS 1 HIGH DSCH PRESS SHUTDOWN
SYS 2 NO FAULTS Displays Local or Remote control selection.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
C O N T R O L M O D E F A N C O N T R O L O N
L E A V I N G L I Q U I D P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G
Displays the type of chilled liquid control; Leaving or Displays the programmed Fan On Pressure.
Return. F A N D I F F E R E N T I A L O F F
P R E S S U R E = P S I G
L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
X X X X X X X X
Displays the programmed Fan Off Differential.
Displays the type of lead/lag control; Manual System 1,
Manual System 2 or Automatic. This is only selectable S Y S 1 T R I P V O L T S
on 2-system chillers. = X . X V O L T S
F A N C O N T R O L
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage.
D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E
S Y S 2 T R I P V O L T S
Displays the type of fan control; Discharge Pressure or = X . X V O L T S
Ambient and Discharge Pressure.
Displays the programmed High Current Trip Voltage.
M A N U A L O V E R R I D E M O D E Y O R
K H Y
D R
O
X X X X X X X X X K I T P
U M
P S = X
Displays whether Manual Override was Enabled or Indicates the Pump Control option is selected.
Disabled.
L C H L T = X X X . X ° F
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K R C H L T = X X X . X ° F
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Displays the Leaving and Return chilled Liquid
Displays type of Current Feedback utilized. Temperature at the time of the fault.
S O F T S T A R T S E T P O I N T = X X X . X ° F 7
X X X X X X X R A N G E = + / - ° F
Displays whether the optional European Soft Start was Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if
installed and selected. the chiller is programmed for leaving chilled liquid
control.
C U T O U T = X X X X P S I G S E T P O I N T = X X X . X ° F
R A N G E = + X X . X ° F
Displays the programmed Discharge Pressure Cutout.
Displays the programmed Setpoint and Range, if the
S U C T I O N P R E S S U R E chiller is programmed for return chilled liquid control.
C U T O U T = X X X X P S I G
A M B I E N T A I R T E M P
= X X X . X ° F
Displays the programmed Suction Pressure Cutout.
Displays the Ambient Temp. at the time of the fault.
L O W A M
L E A D S Y S T E M I S
S Y S T E M N U M B E R X
Displays which system is in the lead at the time of the

fault.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
“ENTRY” KEYS
7
00068VIP
The ENTRY keys allows the user to view, change Enter/ADV Key
programmed values. The ENTRY keys consist of an ↑
The ENTER/ADV key must be pushed after any change
(UP) arrow key, ↓ (DOWN) arrow key, and an ENTER/
is made to the cooling setpoints, daily schedule, safety
ADV key.
setpoints, chiller options, and the clock. Pressing this key
“enters” the new values into memory. If the ENTER/
Up and Down Arrow Keys
ADV key is not pressed after a value is changed, the
Used in conjunction with the OPER DATA, HISTORY, changes will not be “entered” and the original values
COOLING SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE will be used to control the chiller.
DAY, OPTIONS and CLOCK keys, the ↑ (UP) and
↓(DOWN) arrow keys allow the user to scroll through Programming and a description on the use of the ↑ (UP)
the various data screens. Refer to the section on arrow key, and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and ENTER/ADV
“DISPLAY/PRINT” keys for specific information on the keys are covered in detail under the SETPOINTS and
displayed information and specific use of the ↑ (UP) and UNIT keys.
↓ (DOWN) arrow keys.
The ↑ (UP) arrow key, and ↓ (DOWN) arrow key are also
used for programming the control panel such as changing
numerical or text values when programming cooling
setpoints, setting the daily schedule, changing safety
setpoints, chiller options, and setting the clock.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
“SETPOINTS” KEYS
00069VIP
Programming of the cooling setpoints, daily schedule, Leaving Chilled Liquid Control
and safeties is accomplished by using the keys located
under the SETPOINTS section of the control panel. S E T P O I N T = 4 5 . 0 ° F
R A N G E = +/- 2 . 0 ° F
The three keys involved are labeled COOLING
SETPOINTS, SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY, and The above message shows the current chilled water
PROGRAM. temperature SETPOINT at 45.0 °F (notice the cursor
positioned under the number 0). Pressing either the ↑
The following are instructions for programming the (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow will change the setpoint in
respective setpoints. The same instruction should be .5 °F increments. After using the ↑ (UP) or ↓ (DOWN)
used to view the setpoints with the exception that the arrow keys to adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/
setpoint will not be changed. ADV key must be pressed to enter this number into
memory and advance to the RANGE SETPOINT.
Cooling Setpoints
The Cooling Setpoint and Range can be programmed by Entry of the setpoint will be indicated by the cursor
pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key. The cooling moving under the current RANGE setpoint. The ↑ (UP)
mode (leaving chilled liquid or return chilled liquid) will and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are used to set the RANGE,
be displayed for a few seconds, and the setpoint display in .5 °F increments, to the desired RANGE setpoint.
entry screen will appear. After adjusting the setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must
be pressed to enter the data into memory.
Notice that the RANGE was programmed for plus or

minus X.X° F. This indicates the SETPOINT to be in
the center of the control range. If the control mode
has been programmed for RETURN LIQUID control,
the message below would be displayed in place of the
previous message.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
When in leaving chilled liquid temperature control, The following messages illustrate both leaving
the microprocessor board will attempt to control the chilled liquid control and return chilled liquid control
leaving water temperature within the temperature range respectively.
of the setpoint plus or minus the range. In the above
example, control will be in the range of 43°F – 47 °F R E M S E T P = 4 4 . 0 ° F
(6.1 °C - 8.3°C). R A N G E = + / - 2 . 0 ° F
Return Chilled Liquid Control (leaving chilled liquid control)

S E T P O I N T = 4 5 . 0 ° F R E M S E T P = 4 4 . 0 ° F
R A N G E = + 1 0 . 0 ° F R A N G E = + 1
0 . 0 ° F
In return chilled liquid control, the range no longer has (return chilled liquid control)
a +/- X.X °F, but only a + X.X °F RANGE setpoint.
This indicates that the setpoint is not centered within The low limit, high limit, and default values for the keys
the RANGE but could be described as the bottom under “SETPOINTS” are listed in Table 10.
of the control range. A listing of the limits and the
programmable values for the COOLING SETPOINTS Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS a third time will
are shown in Table 10. bring up the display that allows the Maximum EMS-
PWM Temperature Reset to be programmed. This
The SETPOINT and RANGE displays just described message is shown below.
were based on LOCAL control. If the unit was
M A X E M S - P W M R E M O T E
programmed for REMOTE control (under the OPTIONS
T E M P R E S E T = + 2 0 ° F
key), the above programmed setpoints would have no
effect.
The Temp Reset value is the maximum allowable remote
When in return chilled liquid temperature control, reset of the temperature setpoint. The setpoint can be
the microprocessor board will turn all compressors reset upwards by the use of an Energy Management
off at setpoint and will turn compressors on as return System. See page 164 & 176 for a detailed explanation
chilled liquid temperature rises. All compressors will of this feature. 7
be on at setpoint plus the range. If the range equals
the temperature drop across the evaporator when fully As with the other setpoints, the ↑ (UP) arrow and ↓
loaded, the leaving chilled liquid temperature will (DOWN) arrow keys are used to change the Temp Reset
remain near the setpoint, plus or minus a few degrees as value. After using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrows to
the chiller loads and unloads according to return chilled adjust to the desired setpoint, the ENTER/ADV key must
liquid temperature. be pressed to enter this number into memory.
Both LEAVING and RETURN control are described SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY KEY
in detail under the “Capacity Control” section of this The SCHEDULE is a seven day daily schedule that
IOM. allows one start/stop time per day. The schedule can be
programmed Monday through Sunday with an alternate
Remote Setpoints Control holiday schedule available. If no start/stop times are
Pressing the COOLING SETPOINTS key a second programmed, the unit will run on demand, providing the
time will display the remote setpoint and cooling chiller is not shut off on a unit or system shutdown. The
range. This display automatically updates about every daily schedule is considered “not programmed” when
2 seconds. Notice that these setpoints are not “locally” the times in the schedule are all zeros (00:00 AM).
programmable, but are controlled by a remote device
such as an ISN control, remote reset option board, or To set the schedule, press the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE
remote PWM signal. These setpoints would only be valid DAY key. The display will immediately show the
if the unit was operating in the REMOTE mode. following display.
M
O N S T A R T = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
S T O P = 0 0 : 0 0 A M

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 10 – COOLING SETPOINTS, PROGRAMMABLE LIMITS AND DEFAULTS
SETPOINT KEY MODE LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT

40.0 °F **70.0 °F 44.0 °F
WATER COOLING
4.4 °C 21.1 °C 6.7 °C
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SETPOINT
10.0 °F **70.0 °F 44.0 °F
GLYCOL COOLING*

-12.2 °C 21.1 °C 6.7 °C
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID 1.5 °F 2.5 °F 2.0 °F
—
CONTROL RANGE 0.8 °C 1.4 °C 1.1 °C
40.0 °F 70.0 °F 44.0 °F
WATER COOLING
4.4 °C 21.1 °C 6.7 °C
RETURNED CHILLED LIQUID SETPOINT
10.0 °F 70.0 °F 44.0 °F
GLYCOL COOLING* 12.2 °C 21.1 °C 6.7 °C
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID 4.0 °F 20.0 °F 10.0 °F
—
CONTROL RANGE 2.2 °C 11.1 °C 5.6 °C
MAX EMS-REMOTE 2 °F 40 °F 20 °F
—
TEMPERATURE RESET 1.0 °C 22.0 °C 11.0 °C
* Refer to Engineering Guide for operation below 30 °F (-1.1 °C). Alternate thermal expansion valves must be used
below 30 °F (-1.1 °C).
* When using glycol, Leaving Chilled Liquid Setpoint should not be set below 20 °F (-6.7 °C).
** Do not exceed 55 °F (12.8 °C) setpoint before contacting the nearest Johnson Controls Office for application
guidelines.
The line under the 0 is the cursor. If the value is wrong, After the SUN (Sunday) schedule appears on the display
it may be changed by using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) a subsequent press of the SCHEDULE/ADVANCE DAY
arrow keys until correct. Pressing the ENTER/ADV key will display the Holiday schedule. This is a two part
key will enter the times and then move the cursor to the display. The first reads:
minute box. The operation is then repeated if necessary.
This process may be followed until the hour, minutes, H O L S T A R T = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
and meridian (AM or PM) of both the START and STOP S T O P = 0 0 : 0 0 A M
points are set. After changing the meridian of the stop
time, pressing the ENTER/ADV key will advance the The times may be set using the same procedure as
schedule to the next day. described above for the days of the week. After
changing the meridian of the stop time, pressing the
Whenever the daily schedule is changed ENTER/ADV key will advance the schedule to the
for Monday, all the other days will following display:
change to the new Monday schedule.
This means if the Monday times are S __
M T W T F S
H O L I D A Y N O T E D B Y *
not applicable for the whole week
then the exceptional days would need
to be reprogrammed to the desired The line below the empty space next to the S is the
schedule. cursor and will move to the next empty space when
the ENTER/ADV key is pressed. To set the Holiday,
the cursor is moved to the space following the day of
To page to a specific day, press the SCHEDULE/
the week of the holiday and the ↑ (UP) arrow key is
ADVANCE DAY key until the desired day appears. The
pressed. An * will appear in the space signifying that
start and stop time of each day may be programmed
day as a holiday. The * can be removed by pressing the
differently using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow, and
↓ (DOWN) arrow key.
ENTER/ADV keys.
The Holiday schedule must be programmed weekly
–once the Holiday schedule runs, it will revert to the
normal daily schedule.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
PROGRAM KEY L O W A M B I E N T T E M P
There are several operating parameters under the C U T O U T = 2 5 . 0 ° F
PROGRAM key that are programmable. These setpoints
can be changed by pressing the PROGRAM key, and
then the ENTER/ADV key to enter Program Mode. The LOW AMBIENT TEMP CUTOUT allows the user
Continuing to press the ENTER/ADV key will display to select the chiller outside ambient temperature cutout
each operating parameter. While a particular parameter point. If the ambient falls below this point, the chiller
is being displayed, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow will shut down. Restart can occur when temperature rises
keys can be used to change the value. After the value is 2 °F (1.11 °C) above the cutout setpoint.
changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to enter L E A V I N G L I Q U I D T E M P
the data into memory. Table 11 shows the programmable C U T O U T = 3 6 . 0 ° F
limits and default values for each operating parameter.
The following are the displays for the programmable The LEAVING LIQUID TEMP CUTOUT protects
values in the order they appear: the chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. Anytime the
leaving chilled liquid temperature drops to the cutout
d D I S C H A R G E P R E S S U R E point, the chiller shuts down. Restart will be permitted
C U T O U T = 5 7 0 P S I G when the leaving chilled liquid temperature rises 2 °F
(1.11 °C) above the cutout setpoint.
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT is the discharge When water cooling mode is programmed (OPTIONS
pressure at which the system will shutdown as monitored key), the value is fixed at 36.0 °F (2.22 °C) and cannot
by the optional discharge transducer. This is a software be changed. Glycol cooling mode can be programmed
shutdown that acts as a backup for the mechanical high to values listed in Table 11.
pressure switch located in the refrigerant circuit. The
system can restart when the discharge pressure drops A N T I R E C Y C L E T I M E R
40 PSIG (2.76 barg) below the cutout point. = 6 0 0 S E C
If the optional discharge pressure transducer is not The programmable anti-recycle timer assures that
installed, this programmable safety would not apply. systems do not short cycle, and the compressor motors
It should be noted that every system has a mechanical have sufficient time to dissipate heat after a start.
7
high pressure cutout that protects against excessive This timer is programmable under the PROGRAM
high discharge pressure regardless of whether or not the key between 300 – 600 seconds. Whenever possible,
optional discharge pressure is installed. to reduce cycling and motor heating, the anti-recycle
timer should be adjusted as high as possible. The
S U C T I O N P R E S S U R E programmable anti-recycle timer starts when the first
C U T O U T = 80 . 0 P S I G compressor in a system starts. The timer begins to count
down. If all the compressors in the circuit cycle off,
The SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT protects the a compressor within the circuit will not be permitted
chiller from an evaporator freeze-up. If the suction to start until the anti-recycle timer has timed out. If
pressure drops below the cutout point, the system will the lead system has run for less than 5 minutes, three
shut down. Typically, the cutout should be set to 80 PSIG times in a row, the anti-recycle timer will be extended
(5.52 Bars) from water cooling. to 10 minutes, if currently programmed for les than 10
minutes.
There are some exceptions when the
F A N C O N T R O L O N
suction pressure is permitted to tem-
P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G
porarily drop below the cutout point.
Details are explained under the topic
The Fan Control On-Pressure is the programmed
of SYSTEM SAFETIES.
pressure value that is used to stage the condenser fans
on, in relation to discharge pressure. Refer to Condenser
Fan Control in the “Unit Operation” section of this IOM
and Tables 19, 20, 21 and 22.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
F A N D I F F E R E N T I A L O F F N U
M B
E R O
F F
A N
S
P R E S S U R E = X X X P S I G P E
R S Y
S T
E M = X
The Fan Differential Off Pressure is the programmed The Number of Fans Per System must be programmed as
differential pressure value that is used to stage the needed to match the number of fans on each system.
condenser fans off, in relation to discharge pressure.
Refer to Condenser Fan Control in the “Unit Operation” S Y S X T R I P V O L T S
section of this IOM and Tables 19, 20, 21 and 22. = X . X V O L T S
T O T A L N U M B E R O F
C O M P R E S S O R S = 6 U N I T T R I P V O L T S
= X . X V O L T S
The TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS is the total

quantity of compressors in the chiller, and determines Depending on the option, the trip voltage for a
the stages of cooling available. Note in Table 12, the specific system or unit high current trip can be
chiller may have single or dual systems. Dual system programmed. It also calibrates the current readout
units may have 4, 5 or 6 compressors. under the OPER DATA key. The approximate
programmed value is calculated using the following
This MUST be programmed correctly formulas.
to assure proper chiller operation.
System Trip Volts
For individual system high current trip programming
on chillers:
• Add the sum of the compressor and fan RLA’s in
the system
• Multiply the sum by 1.25
• Divide by 225A
• The resulting voltage is the value that should be
programmed
For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 100A:

5V x 100A 625VA
x 1.25 = = 2.8V
225A 225A
The programmed value will be 2.8V. A similar

calculation and programming will be necessary for the
other system in a 2-system chiller.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Unit Trip Volts R

E M O T E U N I T I D
For total chiller high current trip programming on P R O G R A M M E D = X
460VAC chillers:
When communications is required with a BAS or
• Add the sum of all the compressor and fan RLA’s OptiView Panel, individual unit IDs are necessary for
in the chiller. communications with specific chillers on a single RS-
• Multiply the sum by 1.25 485 line. Remote Unit ID 0-7 are selectable.
• Divide by 225A
• The resulting voltage is the value that should be
programmed.
For example, if fan and compressor RLA’s total 180A:

5V x 180A 1125VA
x 1.25 = = 5.0V
225A 225A
The programmed value will be 5.0V.
TABLE 11 – PROGRAM KEY LIMITS AND DEFAULT
PROGRAM VALUE MODE LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT DEFAULT

325 PSIG 575 PSIG 570 PSIG
DISCHARGE PRESSURE CUTOUT —
22.4 BARG 39.6 BARG 39.3 BARG
80.0 PSIG 120.0 PSIG 80.0 PSIG
WATER COOLING
SUCTION PRESSURE CUTOUT
42.0 PSIG 70.0 PSIG 44.0 PSIG
GLYCOL COOLING
25.0 °F 60.0 °F 25.0 °F
STANDARD AMBIENT
-3.9 °C 15.6 °C -3.9 °C
LOW AMBIENT TEMP. CUTOUT
0 °F 60.0 °F 25.0 °F
7
LOW AMBIENT
-17.8 °C 15.6 °C -3.9 °C
36 °F
WATER COOLING — —
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID
2.2 °C
TEMP. CUTOUT -1.0 °F 36.0 °F 36.0 °F
GLYCOL COOLING
-18.3 °C 2.2 °C 2.2 °C
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER — 300 SEC. 600 SEC. 600 SEC.
360 PSIG 485 PSIG 385 PSIG
FAN CONTROL ON PRESSURE —
80 PSID 160 PSID* 125 PSID
FAN DIFFERENTIAL OFF PRESSURE —
5.51 BARD 11.03 BARD* 8.62 BARD
SINGLE SYSTEM 2 3 3
TOTAL NUMBER OF COMPRESSORS
DUAL SYSTEM 4 6 6

NUMBER OF FANS PER SYSTEM 2 4 3

UNIT/SYSTEM TRIP VOLTS CURRENT FEEDBACK 0.5 Volts 4.5 Volts 2.5 Volts

REMOTE UNIT ID — 0 7 0

* The minimum discharge pressure allowed is 235 PSIG. The Fan Differential Off Pressure High Limit will be lowered (reduced) to
prevent going below 235 PSIG based on where the fan control On Pressure is programmed.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 12 – SETPOINTS QUICK REFERENCE LIST
Quick Reference Programming Chart

Setpoints Section
Cooling Setpoints Key Schedule/ Program Mode

(press key to adv.) Advance Day Key (press enter to adv.)
Local Leaving Mon. – Sun. Discharge

Water Temp Control & Pressure
(Display Only) Holiday Cutout
Schedule
Chilled Liquid Suction

Setpoint Pressure
& Cutout
Range
Remote Setpoint Low Ambient Temp.

& Cutout
Range
(Display Only)
Leaving Liquid
EMS - PWM Temperature
Remote Temp Cutout
Reset Setpoint
Anti-Recycle
Table 12
Table 16 provides a quick reference of the setpoints list for the Setpoints Keys.
Timer
Fan Control
On-Pressure
Fan Differential
Off-Pressure
Total Numbers
of
Compressors
Number of
Fans Per System
SYS / Unit
Trip Volts Option
Remote Unit ID
LD07404c

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
“UNIT” KEYS
OPTIONS
CLOCK
00070VIP
Options Key This allows both systems to run

There are many user programmable options under the or
S Y S 1 S W I T C H O N
OPTIONS key. The OPTIONS key is used to scroll
S Y S 2 S W I T C H O F F
through the list of options by repeatedly pressing the
OPTIONS key. After the selected option has been This turns system 2 off
displayed, the ↑ (UP) and ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys are then
used to change that particular option. After the option
is changed, the ENTER/ADV key must be pressed to
enter the data into memory. This turns system 1 off
or
Many of the OPTIONS displayed
are only programmable under the
SERVICE MODE and not under the
7
OPTIONS key. Options only program-
This turns systems 1 & 2 off
mable under the SERVICE MODE
are noted in the details describing the
Turning a system off with its system
option.
switch allows a pumpdown to be per-
Table 13 shows the programmable options. Following formed prior to shutdown.
are the displays in the order they appear:
Option 1 – Language:
Option 3 – Chilled Liquid Cooling Type:
D I S P L A Y L A N G U A G E
C H I L L E D L I Q U I D
E N G L I S H
W A T E R
English, Spanish, French, German, and Italian can be The chilled liquid is water. The Cooling Setpoint can be
programmed. programmed from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C)
or
Option 2 – System Switches: (two system units
only) C H I L L E D L I Q U I D
(Single System Display is similar) G L Y C O L
S Y S 2 S W I T C H O N The chilled liquid is glycol. The Cooling Setpoint can
be programmed from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1
°C).
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Option 4 – Ambient Control Type: C O N T R O L M O D E

L E A V I N G L I Q U I D
S T A N D A R D Unit control is based on leaving chilled liquid temp.
Leaving Chilled Liquid Control can only be selected on
The low ambient cutout is adjustable from 25 °F to 60 °F units that have 4 to 6 compressors (dual system units).
(-3.9 °C to 15.6 °C).
or
Option 7 – Display Units:
L O W A M B I E N T D I S P L A Y U N I T S
I M P E R I A L
The low ambient cutout is programmable down to 0 °F This mode displays system operating values in Imperial
(-17.8 °C). A low ambient kit MUST be installed for units of °F or PSIG.
this option to be chosen. If the kit is NOT installed, or
and low ambient is selected, low pressure faults and
compressor damage may occur. D I S P L A Y U N I T S
S I
Option 5 – Local/Remote Control Type:
This mode displays system operating values in Scientific
L O C A L / R E M O T E M O D E L International Units of °C or barg.
L O C A L
Option 8 – Lead/Lag Type (two system units
When programmed for LOCAL, an ISN or RCC control only):
can be used to monitor only. The micropanel will operate
on locally programmed values and ignore all commands L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
from remote devices, or through the RS-485 inputs. The M A N U A L S Y S 1 L E A D
chiller will communicate and send data to the remote
monitoring devices. SYS 1 selected as lead compressor. SYS 1 lead option
or MUST be chosen if Hot Gas Bypass is installed.
or
L O C A L / R E M O T E M O D E
R E M O T E L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
M A N U A L S Y S 2 L E A D
This mode should be selected when an ISN or RCC
control is to be used to control the chiller. This mode SYS 2 selected as lead compressor.
will allow the ISN to control the following items: or
Remote Start/Stop, Cooling Setpoint, Load Limit, and
History Buffer Request. If the unit receives no valid L E A D / L A G C O N T R O L
ISN transmission for 5 minutes, it will revert back to A U T O M A T I C
the locally programmed values.
Lead/lag between systems may be selected to help
Option 6 – Unit Control Mode:
equalize average run hours between systems on chillers
C O N T R O L M O D E with 2 refrigerant systems. Auto lead/lag allows
R E T U R N L I Q U I D automatic lead/lag of the two systems based on an
average run hours of the compressors in each system.
Unit control is based on return chilled liquid temperature. A new lead/lag assignment is made whenever all
Return Chilled Liquid Control can only be selected on compressors shut down. The microprocessor board will
units that have 4 to 6 compressors (dual system units). then assign the “lead” to the system with the shortest
average run time.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Option 9 – Condenser Fan Control Mode: C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K

O N E P E R S Y S T E M
F A N C O N T R O L
This mode should be selected when an optional
2ACE module is installed to allow individual current
Condenser fans are controlled by discharge pressure monitoring of each system. SYS 1 input is to J7 of the
only. This mode must be chosen. I/O. SYS 2 input is to J8 of the I/O.
or Option 12 – Power Fail Restart:

F A N C O N T R O L P O W E R F A I L R E S T A R T
A M B I E N T & D S C H P R E S S A U T O M A T I C
Do not select this option on R-410A chillers. Chiller auto restarts after a power failure.
Option 10 – Manual Override Mode: P O W E R F A I L R E S T A R T
M A N U A L
M A N U A L O V E R R I D E M O D E
D I S A B L E D
After a power failure, the UNIT switch must be toggled
This option allows overriding of the daily schedule before restart at the unit is allowed. NORMALLY
that is programmed. MANUAL OVERRIDE MODE MANUAL RESTART should NOT BE SELECTED.
– DISABLED indicates that override mode has no
effect. Option 13 – Soft Start Enable/Disable:
or
S O F T S T A R T
M A N U A L O V E R R I D E M O D E D I S A B L E D
E N A B L E D
SOFT START “DISABLED” MUST be selected on all
Manual Override Mode is enabled. This is a service chillers.
function and when enabled, will allow the unit to
start when shut down on the daily schedule. It will This message may not be viewable on non-European 7
automatically be disabled after 30 minutes. chillers.
Option 11 – Current Feedback Options Option 14 – Unit Type:

Installed:
U N I T T Y P E
L I Q U I D C H I L L E R
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K

N O N E
The UNIT TYPE message cannot be modified under
the unit keys.
This mode should be selected when the panel is not
equipped with current sensing capability. “LIQUID CHILLER” must be dis-
or played, or damage to compressors or
other components will occur if oper-
C U R R E N T F E E D B A C K

ated in the HEAT PUMP or CON-
O N E P E R U N I T
DENSING UNIT modes.
This mode should be selected when an optional

2ACE Module is installed to allow combined current If unit type needs to be changed to make the unit a liquid
monitoring of all systems by sensing current on the chiller, remove power and then remove the jumper
incoming line. between J11-7 and J11-12 on the I/O Board. Reapply
or power to the micropanel and the microprocessor will
store the change.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Option 15 – Refrigerant Type: F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E

E N A B L E
D
R E F R I G E R A N T T Y P E
R – 4 1 0 A
Press the ENTER key and the following message will
be displayed until the update has been completed. The
Refrigerant type R-410A must be selected under Service
keypad and display will not respond during the update.
Mode. Refrigerant type is displayed under the OPTIONS
DO NOT reset or power down the chiller until the update
Key, but is only programmable in Service Mode.
is completed.
Incorrect programming may cause F L A S H C A R D U P D A T I N G
damage to compressors. P L E A S E W A I T . . .
After the update is completed, an automatic reboot will

occur. If an error occurred, the following message will
appear with the error code and no reboot will occur.
Option 16 – Expansion Valve Type: F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E

E R R O R XXXXX
X P A N S I O N
E V A L V E T Y P E
T H E R M O S T A T I C
If the update resulted in an error, the original program

Expansion valve type, thermostatic or electronic will still be active. When an error occurs, assure the
may be selected under Service Mode. Expansion valve correct Flash Card was utilized. Incorrect chiller
type is displayed under the OPTIONS key, but is software will cause an error. If this is not the case, the
only programmable in Service Mode. YLAA chillers Flash Card is most likely defective or the IPU and I/O
will typically always be equipped with thermostatic combo board is bad.
expansion valves.
Option 18 – Remote Temperature Reset:
Incorrect programming may cause
damage to compressors. R E M O T E T E M P R E S E T
I
N P U T XXXXXXXXXXXXXX
Remote Temp Reset input selection is programmable

according to the type of input utilized. The following
Also see the UNIT KEYS PROGRAMMING QUICK options are available:
REFERENCE LIST in Table 15. • DISABLED (default)
• 0.0 – 10.0 (DC)
Option 17 – Flash Card Update: • 2.0 – 10.0V (DC)
F L A S H C A R D U P D A T E • 0.0 – 20.0 mA
D I S A B L
E D • 4.0 – 20.0 mA
A Flash Card is used to input the operating program The options display message for Re-
into the chiller IPU. A Flash Card is used instead of an mote Temp Reset Input only appears if
EPROM. Normally, a Flash Card update is not required the Temp Reset Option is enabled un-
and the message above will be displayed. der Service Mode. The option must be
enabled under the Service Mode for
If the operating software is to be updated, insert the Flash the Remote Temperature Reset to oper-
Card into the Flash Card input port. Turn off the unit ate.
switch and set the Flash Card Update to “ENABLED”
using the ↑ and ↓ keys.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Option 19 – Pump Control: Option 20 – Pump Selection:
Pump Control is utilized to operate the optional onboard The displays for this PUMP SELECTION option should
pump kit or to control an external pump through dry only appear if “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 2" are
contacts 23 and 24 on Terminal Block XTBC2. To use selected under Option 19. Presently, this option should
this option, the following selection should be made in not be used.
the Service Mode.
CLOCK
Y O R
K H
Y D
R O
K I T P
U M
P S = 1 The CLOCK display shows the current day, time, and
date. Pressing the CLOCK key will show the current
day, time, and date.
When YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 1, the controls
will be closed to run the pumps whenever any one of It is important that the date and time be correct,
the following conditions are true: otherwise the daily schedule will not function as desired
• Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault if programmed. In addition, for ease of troubleshooting
• Any compressor is running via the History printouts, the day, time, and date should
be correct.
• Daily Schedule is ON and Remote Stop is
closed.
To change the day, time, and date press the CLOCK
key. The display will show something similar to the
Even if one of the above conditions are
following.
true, the pump will not run if the
chiller has been powered up for less T O D A Y I S F R I 0 8 : 5 1 A M
than 30 seconds; or if the pump has 2 5 J A N 0 2
run in the last 30 seconds to prevent
pump overheating. The line under the F is the cursor. If the day is correct,
press the ENTER/ADV key. The cursor will move under
the 0 in 08 hours. If the day is incorrect, press the ↑
E X
T E
R N
A L (UP) or ↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired day is
E
V A
P P U
M P displayed and then press the ENTER/ADV key at which 7
time the day will be accepted and the cursor will move
EXTERNAL EVAP PUMP should be selected if an under the first digit of the “2 digit hour”. In a similar
external pump is being controlled with the chiller pump manner, the hour, minute, meridian, month, day, and
contacts. The operation will be the same as YORK year may be programmed, whenever the cursor is under
HDRO KIT PUMPS = 1 the first letter/numeral of the item. Press the ↑ (UP) or
↓ (DOWN) arrow keys until the desired hour, minute,
The following option should not be selected. meridian; day, month, and year are displayed. Pressing
the ENTER/ADV Key will save the value and move the
Y O R
K H
Y D
R O
cursor on to the next programmable variable.
K I T P
U M
P S = 2

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 13 – UNIT KEYS OPTIONS PROGRAMMING QUICK REFERENCE LIST
Options Key
Expansion Valve Type
(press Options Key
to adv.) (Thermoplastic or Electric)
(Programmed under Service
Display Language Mode, Viewable Only)
Must be programmed
System Switches for Thermostatic
on/off
Flash Card Update
Chilled Liquid Type
(water or glycol)
Remote Temp Reset
Ambient Control
Pump Control
(standard or low)
Pump Selection
Local/Remote Mode
Unit Control Mode

(Return or Leaving)
Display Units
(English or Metric)
System Lead/Lag Control

(Manual or Automatic)
Fan Control Mode
Manual Override Mode
Current Feedback Option
Power Failure Restart
Soft Start Option
Unit Type
(”Chiller” MUST be Selected
Via No Jumper Installed
(Viewable Only)
Refrigerant Type
R-410A
(Programmed under Service Mode)
Viewable Only)
Table 13 provides a quick reference list for the Unit key setpoints. LD07405d

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 8 – UNIT OPERATION

CAPACITY CONTROL LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL
To initiate the start sequence of the chiller, all run The setpoint, when programmed for Leaving Chilled
permissive inputs must be satisfied (flow/remote start/ Liquid Control, is the temperature the unit will control
stop switch), and no chiller or system faults should to within plus or minus the (control) cooling range. The
exist. Setpoint High Limit is the setpoint plus the cooling
range. The Setpoint Low Limit is the setpoint minus
The first phase of the start sequence is initiated by the the cooling range. Fig. 58 should be utilized to aid in
Daily Schedule Start or any Remote Cycling Device. If understanding the following description of Leaving
the unit is shut down on the daily schedule, the chilled Chilled Liquid Control.
water pump contacts (Terminals 23 and 24 of XTBC2)
will close to start the pump when the daily schedule start If the leaving chilled liquid temperature is above the
time has been reached. Once flow has been established Setpoint High Limit, the lead compressor on the lead
and the flow switch closes, capacity control functions are system will be energized along with the liquid line
initiated, if the remote cycling contacts wired in series solenoid. Upon energizing any compressor, the 60
with the flow switch are closed. second Anti-Coincidence timer will be initiated to
prevent multiple compressors from turning on.
It should be noted that the chilled water pump contacts
(Terminals 23 and 24 of XTBC2) are not required to If after 60 seconds of run-time the leaving chilled liquid
be used to cycle the chilled water pump. However, in temperature is still above the Setpoint High Limit,
all cases the flow switch must be closed to allow unit the next compressor in sequence will be energized.
operation. Additional compressors will be energized at a rate of
one every 60 seconds, if the chilled liquid temperature
The control system will evaluate the need for cooling remains above the Setpoint High Limit and the chilled
by comparing the actual leaving or return chilled liquid liquid temperature is dropping less than 3 °F (-16.1°C/
temperature to the desired setpoint, and regulate the per minute. The lag system will not be allowed to
leaving or return chilled liquid temperature to meet that start a compressor until the lead system has run for 5
desired setpoint. minutes.
SUCTION PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS If the chilled liquid temperature falls below the Setpoint
The anticipatory controls are intended to prevent the High Limit, but is greater than the Setpoint Low Limit,
unit from ever actually reaching a low-pressure cutout. loading and unloading will not occur. This area of control
Loading is prevented if the suction pressure drops below is called the control range.
1.15 x suction pressure cutout (15% below the cutout).
If the chilled liquid temperature drops to between the
Loading may reoccur after suction pressure rises above
Setpoint Low Limit and 0.5 °F (.28 °C) below the
8
the unload point and a period of one minute elapses. This
control is only operable if the optional suction pressure Setpoint Low Limit, unloading (a compressor turns off)
transducers are installed. occurs at a rate of one every 30 seconds. If the chilled
liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 0.5 °F
DISCHARGE PRESSURE LIMIT CONTROLS (.28 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit but not greater
than 1.5 °F (-16.9 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit,
The discharge pressure limit controls unload a system unloading occurs at a rate of 20 seconds. If the chilled
before it reaches a safety limit due to high load or dirty liquid temperature falls to a value greater than 1.5 °F
condenser coils. The microprocessor board monitors (-16.9 °C) below the Setpoint Low Limit, unloading
discharge pressure and unloads a system, if fully loaded, occurs at a rate of 10 seconds. If the chilled liquid
by one compressor when discharge pressure exceeds temperature falls below 1 °F above the low chilled
the programmed cutout minus 10 PSIG (0.69 barg). liquid temperature cutout, unloading occurs at a rate of
Reloading will occur when the discharge pressure on 10 seconds if it is greater than 10 seconds.
the affected system drops to 85% of the unload pressure
and 10 minutes have elapsed. In water cooling mode on R-410A chillers, the minimum
low limit of the control range will be 40.0 ºF (4.4 ºC). For
This control is only applicable if optional discharge leaving chilled liquid temperature setpoint and control
pressure transducers are installed. range combinations that result in the low limit of the
control range being below 40.0ºF (4.4 ºC), the low limit
will be reset to 40.0ºF (4.4 ºC) and the difference will

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
be added to the high limit. This will result in a control
SETPOINT ADJUST (DEG. F)

range the same size as programmed but not allow the
6
unit to run below 40.0ºF (4.4 ºC). This control will not
5
affect glycol chillers. 4
3
Hot gas, if present, will be the final step of capacity. 2
Hot gas is energized when only a single compressor 1
is running and Leaving Water Temperature is less than 0
setpoint. Hot gas is turned off as temperature rises 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
when Leaving Water Temperature is more than setpoint, LAST RUN TIME OF LEAD SYSTEM (MINUTES)
plus the control range divided by two. If temperature LD11415
remains below the setpoint low limit on the lowest step FIG. 59 – SETPOINT ADJUST
of capacity, the microprocessor board will close the
liquid line solenoid, after turning off hot gas, and pump LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/LAG
the system down before turning off the last compressor AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING
in a system.
A Lead/Lag option may be selected to help equalize
average run hours between systems with 2 refrigerant
The leaving chilled liquid setpoint is programmable
systems. This may be programmed under the OPTIONS
from 40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C) in water chilling
key. Auto Lead/Lag allows automatic Lead/Lag of
mode and from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1 °C) in
the two systems based on average run hours of the
glycol chilling mode. In both modes, the cooling range
compressors in each system. Manual Lead/Lag selects
can be from +/-1.5 °F to +/-2.5 °F (+/-.83 °C to 1.39
specifically the sequence which the microprocessor
°C).leaving chilled liquid control
board starts systems.
LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL On a hot water start, once a system starts, it will turn on all
OVERRIDE TO REDUCE CYCLING compressors before the next system starts a compressor.
The microprocessor will sequence compressors within
To avoid compressor cycling the microprocessor board
each circuit to maximize individual compressor run time
will adjust the setpoint upward temporarily. The last run
on individual compressors within a system to prevent
time of the system will be saved. If the last run time was
short cycling.
greater than 5 minutes, no action is to be taken. If the
last run time for the lead system was less than 5 minutes,
Each compressor in a system will be assigned an
the microprocessor will increase the setpoint high limit,
arbitrary priority number 1, 2, or 1, 2, 3. The non-running
with a maximum value allowed of 50 °F (10 °C) (See
compressor within a system with the lowest priority
Fig. 59).
number will always be the next compressor to start. The
running compressor with priority number 1 will always
If adding the setpoint adjust value to the setpoint high
be the next to shut off. Whenever a compressor is shut
limit causes the setpoint high limit to be greater than 50
off, the priority numbers of all compressors will be
°F, the setpoint high limit will be set to 50 °F, and the
decreased by 1 with wrap-around. This control scheme
difference will be added to the setpoint low limit.
assures the same compressor does not repeatedly cycle
on and off.
Once a system runs for greater than 5 minutes, the
setpoint adjust will be set back to 0. This will occur
Once the second system starts a compressor on a 2
while the system is still running.
system chiller, the microprocessor board will attempt
30 sec. Control Range 60 sec. to equally load each system as long as the system is not
unloading (no compressor staging) loading limiting or pumping down. Once this occurs, loading and
unloading will alternate between systems, loading the
lead system first or unloading the lag system first.
44.0 °F 46.0 °F 48.0°
LWT
(6.7 °C) (7.8 °C) (8.9 °C)
Low Limit Setpoint High limit
Leaving Water Temp. Control – Compressor Staging

Setpoint = 46.0 °F (7.8 °C) Range = +/- 2 °F(1.1 °C)
FIG. 58 – L
EAVING WATER TEMPERATURE CONTROL EXAMPLE

Unit FORM
Operation
150.72-NM3 (811)
RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL As an example of compressor staging (refer to Table 14),
(Can be used on Dual System 4, 5 & 6 Comp a chiller with six compressors using a Cooling Setpoint
Units Only) programmed for 45 °F (7.20 °C) and a Range Setpoint
of 10 °F (5.56 °C). Using the formulas in Table 15, the
Return chilled liquid control is based on staging the control range will be split up into six (seven including
compressors to match the cooling load. The chiller will hot gas) segments, with the Control Range determining
be fully loaded when the return water temperature is the separation between segments. Note also that the
equal to the Cooling Setpoint plus the Range. The chiller Cooling Setpoint is the point at which all compressors
will be totally unloaded (all compressors off) when the are off, and Cooling Setpoint plus Range is the point
return water temperature is equal to the Cooling Setpoint all compressors are on. Specifically, if the return water
(See sample in Table 14). At return water temperatures temperature is 55 °F (12.8 °C), then all compressors
between the Cooling Setpoint and Cooling Setpoint will be on, providing full capacity. At nominal gpm, this
plus Range, compressor loading and unloading will be would provide approximately 45 °F (7.2 °C) leaving
determined by the formulas in Table 15. water temperature out of the evaporator.
Return Chilled Liquid Control MUST If the return water temperature drops to 53.4 °F (11.9
°C), one compressor would cycle off leaving five
only be used when constant chilled
compressors running. The compressors would continue
liquid flow is ensured.
to cycle off approximately every 1.7 °F (.94 °C), with
the exception of hot gas bypass. Notice that the hot
The RANGE MUST always be pro- gas bypass would cycle on when the return water
grammed to equal the temperature temperature dropped to 46.25 °F (7.9 °C). At this point
drop across the evaporator when the one compressor would be running with hot gas.
chiller is “fully loaded”. Otherwise,
chilled liquid temperature will over or Should the return water temperature rise from this
under shoot. Variable flow must never point to 46.7 °F (8.2 °C), the hot gas bypass would shut
be used in return chilled liquid mode. off, still leaving one compressor running. As the load
increased, the compressors would stage on every 1.7
Normal loading will occur at intervals of 60 seconds °F (.94 °C).
according to the temperatures determined by the formulas.
Unloading will occur at a rate of 30 seconds according Also note that Table 15 not only provides the formulas
to the temperatures determined in the formulas used for the loading (ON POINT) and unloading (OFF
to calculate the on and off points for each step of POINT) of the system, the “STEP” is also shown in the
tables. The “STEP” is the increment in the sequence of
capacity.
the capacity control scheme that can be viewed under
8
The return chilled liquid setpoint is programmable from the OPER DATA key. Refer to the section in this IOM
40 °F to 70 °F (4.4 °C to 21.1 °C) in water chilling mode on DISPLAY/PRINT keys for specific information on the
and from 10 °F to 70 °F (-12.2 °C to 21.1 °C) in glycol OPER DATA key.
chilling mode. In both modes, the cooling range can be
from 4 °F to 20 °F (2.2° to 11.1 °C).
TABLE 14 – SAMPLE COMPRESSOR STAGING FOR RETURN WATER CONTROL

Compressor Staging for Return Water Control
4 Compressor
Cooling Setpoint = 45 °F (7.2 °C) Range = 10 °F(5.6 °C)
# of Comp ON 0 * 1+HG 1 2 3 4
45 °F 46.25 °F 47.5 °F 50.0 °F 52.5 °F 55.0 °F
RWT
(7.2 °C) (7.9 °C) (8.6 °C) (10.0 °C) (11.4 °C) (12.8 °C)
*Unloading only

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 15 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)

*STEP COMPRESSOR COMPRESSOR ON POINT COMPRESSOR OFF POINT
0 0 SETPOINT SETPOINT
1 1 W/HGB SP + CR/8 (Note 1) SETPOINT
2 1 NO HGB SP + CR/4 SP + CR/8
3 2 SP + 2*CR/4 (Note 2) SP + CR/4
4 2 SP + 2*CR/4 SP + CR/4 (Note 3)
5 3 SP + 3*CR/4 SP + 2*CR/4
6 4 SP + CR SP + 3*CR/4
Notes:
1. Step 1 is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during Pumpdown.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.
* STEP can be viewed using the OPER DATA key and scrolling to COOLING DEMAND.
RETURN CHILLLED LIQUID SYSTEM LEAD/ same compressor from starting two times in a row. The
LAG AND COMPRESSOR SEQUENCING microprocessor board will not attempt to equalize run
A lead/lag option may be selected to help equalize time on individual compressors within a system.
average run hours between systems with two refrigerant
systems. This may be programmed under the OPTIONS Each compressor in a system will be assigned an
key. Auto Lead/Lag of the two systems based on average arbitrary number 1 or 2. The non-running compressor
run hours of the compressors in each system. Manual within a system with the lowest priority number will
Lead/Lag specifically selects the sequence in which the always be the next compressor to start. The running
microprocessor board starts the systems. compressor with priority number 1 will always be the
next compressor to shut off. Whenever a compressor is
The microprocessor board will sequence compressors shut off, the priority numbers of all compressors in each
load and unload systems according to Table 16. The system will be decreased by 1 with the wrap around.
microprocessor will lead/lag compressors within each This control scheme assures the same compressor does
circuit to maximize individual compressor run time not repeatedly cycle on and off.
for the purpose of lubrication. It will also prevent the
TABLE 16 – RETURN CHILLED LIQUID CONTROL FOR 4 COMPRESSORS (6 STEPS)

LEAD SYSTEM LAG SYSTEM
Step COMP 1 COMP 2 - COMP 1 COMP 2 -
0 OFF OFF - OFF OFF -
1 ON + HG OFF - See NOTE 1 OFF OFF -
2 ON OFF - OFF OFF -
3 ON OFF - See NOTE 2 ON OFF -
4 ON ON - See NOTE 3 OFF OFF -
5 ON ON - ON OFF -
6 ON ON - ON ON -
NOTES
1. Step is Hot Gas Bypass and is skipped when loading occurs. Hot Gas Bypass operation is inhibited during pumpdown. For Leaving Chilled
Liquid Control the Hot Gas Bypass solenoid is energized only when the lead compressor is running and the LWT < SP, the Hot Gas Bypass
solenoid is turned off when the LWT > SP + CR/2.
1. Step 1 is not used for loading or unloading.
2. Step 3 is skipped when loading occurs.
3. Step 4 is skipped when unloading occurs.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
ANTI-RECYCLE TIMER EVAPORATOR HEATER CONTROL

The programmable anti-recycle timer assures that The evaporator heater is controlled by ambient air
systems do not cycle. This timer is programmable temperature. When the ambient temperature drops
under the PROGRAM key between 300 – 600 seconds. below 40 °F (4.4 °C) the heater is turned on. When the
Whenever possible, to reduce cycling and motor heating, temperature rises above 45 °F (7.2 °C) the heater is turned
the anti-recycle timer should be adjusted to 600 seconds. off. An under voltage condition will keep the heater off
The programmable anti-recycle timer starts the timer until full voltage is restored to the system.
when the first compressor in a system starts. The timer
begins to count down. If all of the compressors in a PUMPDOWN CONTROL
circuit cycle off, a compressor within the circuit will Each system has a pump-down feature upon shut-off.
not be permitted to start until the anti-recycle timer Manual pumpdown from the keypad is not possible. On
has timed out. If the lead system has run for less than 5 a non-safety, non-unit switch shutdown, all compressors
minutes, 3 times in a row, the anti-recycle timer will be but one in the system will be shut off. The LLSV will
extended to 10 minutes. also be turned off. The final compressor will be allowed
to run until the suction pressure falls below the cutout, or
ANTI-COINCIDENCE TIMER for 180 seconds, whichever comes first.
This timer is not present on single-system units. Two
timing controls are present in software to assure STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL
compressors within a circuit or between systems, do not Condenser fan operation must be programmed with the
start simultaneously. The anti-coincidence timer assures OPTIONS key under “Fan Control.” Condenser fan must
there is at least a one minute delay between system starts be selected for Discharge Pressure only. Fan control by
on 2-circuit systems. This timer is NOT programmable. discharge pressure will work according to the tables on
The load timers further assure that there is a minimum the following pages. The fan control on-pressure and
time between compressor starts within a system. fan differential off-pressure are programmable under the
PROGRAM key. Standard fan control operates down
EVAPORATOR PUMP CONTROL & YORK to a temperature of 25° F (-3.9° C).
HYDRO KIT PUMP CONTROL
The evaporator pump dry contacts (XTBC2 – terminals The delay between turning on and off fan stages is
23 – 24) are energized when any of the following always fixed at 5 seconds.
conditions are true:
When a fan stage is turned on by pressure, the on
1. Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Fault
pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and
2. Any compressor is running ramped back to the programmed on pressure over the
3. Daily Schedule is ON, Unit Switch is ON and next 20 seconds. Typically, standard ambient control 8
Remote Stop is closed. ON pressure should be programmed at 385 PSIG with
a differential of 125 PSIG.
The pump will not run if the micropanel has been
powered up for less than 30 seconds or if the pump When a fan stage is turned off (programmed on pressure
has run in the last 30 seconds to prevent pump motor minus programmed differential), the off pressure for the
overheating. next stage is decreased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the
programmed off pressure minus the differential over the
Whenever the option “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS next 20 seconds.
= 1" is selected under the OPTIONS key, the pump
control will be as described above. DO NOT SELECT Condenser fan locations are shown in Fig. 60. Detailed
the option “YORK HYDRO KIT PUMPS = 2" under Standard Fan Control operation is shown in Table 17
the OPTIONS key. If a dual pump option is installed, and 18.
the active pump is selected by the selector switch.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
CONTROL PANEL
LD13244
FIG. 60 – CONDENSER FAN LOCATIONS WIRING DIAGRAMS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 17 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY
(2, 3, OR 4 FANS PER SYSTEM)
FAN
FAN IPUII I/O OUTPUT FAN #
ON* OFF** CONTACTOR
STAGE
SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2
DP < PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
DP > PROGRAMMED
PRESSURE MINUS
1 FAN CONTROL ON 7B7-8 TB10-8 1-KF1 2-KF1 1-MF1 2-MF2
PROGRAMMED
PRESSURE
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
DP < PROGRAMMED
FAN CONTROL ON
DP > PROGRAMMED
PRESSURE MINUS
FAN CONTROL
PROGRAMMED TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 & 1-MF1 & 2-MF1 &
2 ON PRESSURE &
DIFFERENTIAL TB7-9 TB10-9 1-KF2 2-KF2 1-MF2 2-MF2
FAN STAGE 1 IS
PRESSURE &
ENERGIZED
FAN STAGE 1 IS
ENERGIZED
3 FAN: 3 FAN:
DP < PROGRAMMED
1-MF1 & 2-MF1
FAN CONTROL ON
DP > PROGRAMMED 1-MF2 & & 2-MF2
PRESSURE MINUS
FAN CONTROL ON TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 & 1-MF3 & 2-MF3
PROGRAMMED
3 PRESSURE AND FAN TB7-9 & TB10-9 & 1-KF2 & 2-KF2 & 4 FAN: 4 FAN:
DIFFERENTIAL
STAGES 1 & 2 ARE TB7-10 TB10-10 1-KF3 2-KF3 1-MF1 & 2-MF1 &
PRESSURE & FAN
ENERGIZED 1-MF2 & 2-MF2 &
STAGES 1 & 2 ARE
1-MF3 & 2-MF3 &
ENERGIZED
1-MF4 2-MF4
* When a fan stage is turned on, the pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the
programmed on pressure over the next 20 seconds.
8
** When a fan stage is turned off (Programmed ON pressure minus the differential), the OFF pressure for the next
stage is decreased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the programmed OFF pressure minus the differential.
The time delay (fan delay timer) be-

tween turning fan stages on and off is
fixed at 5 seconds.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 18 – YLAA STANDARD CONDENSER FAN CONTROL USING DISCHARGE PRESSURE ONLY
(5 OR 6 FANS PER SYSTEM)
FAN IPUII I/O OUTPUT FAN CONTACTOR FAN #

ON* OFF**
STAGE SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2 SYS 1 SYS 2
DP <
PROGRAMMED
DP > FAN CONTROL
PROGRAMMED ON PRESSURE
1 TB7-8 TB10-8 1-KF1 2-KF1 1-MF1 2-MF1
FAN CONTROL MINUS
ON PRESSURE PROGRAMMED
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE
DP <
PROGRAMMED
DP > FAN CONTROL
PROGRAMMED ON PRESSURE
1-MF1 & 2-MF1 &
FAN CONTROL MINUS TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 &
2 1-MF2 & 2-MF2 &
ON PRESSURE & PROGRAMMED TB7-9 TB10-9 1-KF2 2-KF2
1-MF3 2-MF3
FAN STAGE 1 IS DIFFERENTIAL
ENERGIZED PRESSURE &
FAN STAGE 1
IS ENERGIZED
5 FAN:
DP < 1-MF1 &
PROGRAMMED 1-MF2 &
DP > FAN CONTROL 1-MF3 &
5 FAN:
PROGRAMMED ON PRESSURE 1-MF4 &
1-MF1 &
FAN CONTROL MINUS TB7-8 & TB10-8 & 1-KF1 & 2-KF1 & 1-MF5
1-MF2 &
3 ON PRESSURE PROGRAMMED TB7-9 & TB10-9 & 1-KF2 & 2-KF2 & 6 FAN:
1-MF3 &
AND FAN DIFFERENTIAL TB7-10 TB10-10 1-KF3 2-KF3 1-MF1 &
1-MF4 &
STAGES 1 & 2 PRESSURE & 1-MF2 &
1-MF5
ARE ENERGIZED FAN STAGES 1-MF3 &
1 & 2 ARE 1-MF4 &
ENERGIZED 1-MF5&
1-MF6
* When a fan stage is turned on, the pressure for the next stage is increased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the
programmed on pressure over the next 20 seconds.
** When a fan stage is turned off (Programmed ON pressure minus the differential), the OFF pressure for the next
stage is decreased 20 PSIG and ramped back to the programmed OFF pressure minus the differential.
The time delay (fan delay timer) be-

tween turning fan stages on and off is
fixed at 5 seconds.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
LOAD LIMITING Simultaneous operation of Remote

Load Limiting is a feature that prevents the unit Load Limiting and EMS-PWM Tem-
from loading beyond the desired value. Two and four perature Reset (described on following
compressor units can be load limited to 50%. This would pages) cannot occur.
allow only one compressor per system to run. Three and
six compressor units can be load limited to 33% or 66%.
The 66% limit would allow up to two compressors per COMPRESSOR RUN STATUS
system to run, and the 33% limit would allow only one
Compressor run status is indicated by closure of contacts
compressor per system to run. Five-compressor units
at XTBC2 – terminals 25 to 26 for system 1 and XTBC2
may be load limited to 40% (one compressor per system
– terminals 27 to 28 for system 2.
runs) or 80% (up to 2 compressors per system). No other
values of limiting are available.
ALARM STATUS
There are two ways to load limit the unit. The first is System or unit shutdown is indicated by normally-open
through remote communication via an ISN. Load limit alarm contacts opening whenever the unit shuts down on
stages are sent through YORK Talk on pages 9 and 10 a unit fault, locks out on a system fault, or experiences
of feature 54. Page 9 is stage 1 load limit and page 10 a loss of power to the chiller electronics . System 1
is stage 2 load limit. alarm contacts are located at XTBC2 – terminals 29 to
30. System 2 alarm contacts are located at XTBC2 –
A second stage of load limiting the unit is accomplished terminals 31 to 32. The alarm contacts will close when
by closing contacts connected to the Load Limit conditions allow the unit to operate, or the fault is reset
(XTBC1 – terminals 13-21) and PWM inputs (XTBC1 during a loss of power, the contacts will remain open
– terminals 13-20). Stage 1 of load limiting involves until power is reapplied and no fault conditions exist.
closing the Load Limit input. Stage 2 of load limiting
involves closing both the Load Limit and PWM inputs.
The first stage of limiting is either 80%, 66% or 50%,
depending on the number of compressors on the unit.
The second stage of limiting is either 40% or 33% and
is only available on 3, 5 & 6 compressor units. Table
19 shows the load limiting permitted for the various
numbers of compressors.
TABLE 19 – COMPRESSOR OPERATION –

LOAD LIMITING 8
COMPRESSORS STAGE 1 STAGE 2
IN UNIT
2 50% -
3 66% 33%
4 50% -
5 80% 40%
6 66% 33%

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
BAS/EMS TEMPERATURE RESET USING

A VOLTAGE OR CURRENT SIGNAL
The Remote Reset Option allows the Control Center If a 4‑20mA signal is supplied, it is applied to terminals
of the unit to reset the chilled liquid setpoint using a A+ and A‑ and jumper JP1 on the I/O board must be
0 ‑ 10VDC input, or a 4‑20mA input connected to installed between pin 1 and 2. To calculate the chilled
XTBC1 terminals A- and A+. Whenever a reset is called liquid setpoint for values between 4mA and 20 mA use
for, the change may be noted by pressing the Cooling the following formula:
Setpoints key twice. The new value will be displayed
as “REM SETP = XXX °F.” Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset
If a 0 ‑ 10VDC signal is supplied, it is applied to °Reset = (mA signal ‑ 4) x (*Max Reset Value)
16
terminals A+ and A‑, and jumper JP1 on the I/O board
Example:
must be inserted between pins 2 and 3. To calculate Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45° (7.22 °C)
the reset chilled liquid setpoint for values between 0VDC *Max Reset Value = 10 °F (5.56 °C)
and 10VDC use the following formula: Input Signal = 12 mA
Setpoint = Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint + °Reset (English)

°Reset = 8mA x 10 °F = 5 °F Reset
°Reset = (DC voltage signal) x (*Max Reset Value) 16
10 Setpoint = 45 °F + 5 °F = 50 °F
Example:
Local Chilled Liquid Setpoint = 45 °F (7.22 °C) (Metric)
*Max Reset Value = 20 °F (11.11 °C) °Reset = 8mA x 5.56 °C = 2.78 °C Reset
Input Signal = 6VDC 16
Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 2.78 °C = 10.0 °C
(English)
°Reset = 6VDC x 20 °F = 12 °F Reset A 240-24V Ratio Transformer (T3)
10 is used to derive nominal 12V output
New Setpoint = 45 °F + 12 °F = 57 °F
from the 120V supply.
(Metric)
°Reset = 6VDC x 11. 11 °C = 6.67 °C Reset
10
New Setpoint = 7.22 °C + 6.67 °C = 13.89 °C
* Max Reset Value is the “Max EMS‑PWM Remote Temp. Reset” setpoint
value described in the programming section under Cooling Setpoints.
Programmable values are from 2 °F to 40 °F (1.11 °C to 11.11
°C).

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

CLEARING HISTORY BUFFERS SYS 1 COMP 3 STATUS TB7-5 IS:
The history buffers may be cleared by pressing the SYS 1 HGBP STATUS TB7-7 IS:
HISTORY key and then repeatedly pressing the UP SYS 2 COMP 1 STATUS TB10-2 IS:
arrow key until you scroll past the last history buffer SYS 2 LLSV STATUS TB10-3 IS:
choice. The following message will be displayed: SYS 2 COMP 2 STATUS TB10-4 IS:
SYS 2 COMP 3 STATUS TB10-5 IS:
I I N I T I A L I Z E H I S T O R Y SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB7-8 IS:
E N T E R = Y E S SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB7-9 IS:
SYS 1 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB7-10 IS:
Pressing the ENTER/ADV key at this display will cause SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 1 TB10-8 IS:
the history buffers to be cleared. Pressing any other key SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 2 TB10-9 IS:
SYS 2 FAN OUTPUT 3 TB10-10 IS:
will cancel the operation.
EVAP HEATER STATUS TB8-2 IS:
SYS 1 ALARM STATUS TB8-3 IS:
DO NOT CLEAR BUFFERS. Impor- SYS 2 ALARM STATUS TB9-2 IS:
tant information may be lost. Contact EVAP PUMP STATUS TB8-6,7 IS:
factory service. SYS 2 HGBV STATUS TB10-7 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-4 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-5 IS:
SPARE DO TB8-8, 9 IS:
SPARE DO TB9-4 IS:
SERVICE MODE SYS 1 EEV OUTPUT TB5-1, 2 = XXX%
SYS 2 EEV OUTPUT TB6-1, 2 = XXX%
Service Mode is a mode that allows the user to enable SYS 1 COND FAN SPEED J15-1,5 = XXX%
or disable all of the outputs (except compressors) on the SYS 2 COND FAN SPEED J15-2,6 = XXX%
unit, change chiller configuration setup parameters and SPARE AO J15-3,7 = XXX%
view all the inputs to the microboard. SPARE AO J15-4,8 = XXX%
DATA LOGGING MODE 1 = ON, 0 = OFF
To enter Service Mode, turn the Unit Switch off and press DATA LOGGING TIMER X SECS
the following keys in the sequence shown; PROGRAM, SOFT START (disabled)
UP ARROW, UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW, DOWN REFRIGERANT TYPE (R410A only)
ARROW, ENTER. Service Mode will time out after 30 EXPANSION VALVE TYPE (Thermostatic Only)
minutes and return to normal control mode, if the panel is REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION =
accidentally left in this mode. Otherwise, turning the unit REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME =
switch on will take the panel out of Service Mode. “NORTH AMERICAN FEATURE SET ENABLED”
HYDRO PUMP SELECTION
SERVICE MODE – OUTPUTS EVAP PUMP TOTAL RUN HOURS
After pressing the key sequence as described, the SYS 1 HOURS 9
control will enter Service Mode permitting the outputs SYS 2 HOURS
(except compressors), operating hours, refrigerant SYS 1 STARTS
type, expansion valve type, and start/hour counters to SYS 2 STARTS
be viewed/modified. The ENTER/ADV key is used to Each display will also show the output connection on
advance through the outputs. Using the ↑ and ↓ (UP/ the microboard for the respective output status shown.
DOWN ) arrow keys will turn the respective digital For example:
output on/off or modify the value. S Y S 1 L L S V S T A T U S
T B
10
- 3 I S O F F
The following is the order of outputs that will appear as
the ENTER/ADV key is pressed:
This display indicates that the system 1 liquid line
SYS 1 COMP 1 STATUS TB7-2 IS: solenoid valve is OFF, and the output connection from
SYS 1 LLSV STATUS TB7-3 IS: the microboard is coming from Terminal Block 10 –
SYS 1 COMP 2 STATUS TB7-4 IS: pin 3.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Section 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Pressing the ↑ (UP) arrow key will energize the liquid SERVICE MODE – ANALOG & DIGITAL
line solenoid valve and “OFF” will change to “ON” INPUTS
in the display as the LLSV is energized. Energizing After entering Service Mode (PROGRAM ↑↑ ↓↓), all
and de-energizing outputs may be useful during digital and analog inputs to the microboard can be viewed
troubleshooting. by pressing the OPER DATA key. After pressing the
OPER DATA key, the ↑ (UP) arrow and ↓ (DOWN)
SERVICE MODE – CHILLER CONFIGURATION arrow keys are used to scroll through the analog and
After the Outputs are displayed, the next group of digital inputs.
displays relate to chiller configuration and start/hour
counters. Data logging, soft start, refrigerant type, pump Following is the order of analog and digital inputs that
control selection and expansion valve type all must be will appear when sequenced with the ↓ (Down) arrow
programmed to match actual chiller configuration. key:
(analog inputs)
Soft start (disabled), Refrigerant Type SYS 1 SUCT PRESSURE
(R410A), and Expansion Valve Type UNIT TYPE
(Thermostatic), and North American SYS 1 *DISCH PRESSURE
Feature (Enabled) MUST be properly SYS 1** SUCTION TEMP.
programmed or damage to compres- SYS 2** SUCTION TEMP.
sors and other system components AMBIENT AIR TEMP.
may result.
LEAVING LIQUID TEMP.
RETURN LIQUID TEMP.
The following is a list of chiller configuration selections, SYS 2 SUCTION PRESSURE
in order of appearance: SYS 2 SPARE
SYS 2 *DISCH PRESSURE
DATA LOGGING MODE = : DO NOT MODIFY
SYS 1 MTR VOLTS
DATA LOGGING TIMER = : DO NOT MODIFY
SYS 2 MTR VOLTS
SOFT START
(digital inputs)
REFRIGERANT TYPE
PWM TEMP RESET INPUT
EXPANSION VALVE TYPE
LOAD LIMIT INPUT
REMOTE TEMP RESET OPTION FLOW SW / REM START
REMOTE INPUT SERVICE TIME SPARE
FEATURE SET SINGLE SYSTEM SELECT
SYS 1 MP / HPCO INPUT
PUMP CONTROL SELECTION
SYS 2 MP / HPCO INPUT
SYS 1 HOURS * The discharge pressure transducer is optional on some models.
SYS 2 HOURS ** The suction temp. sensor is on EEV units only.
SYS 1 STARTS
SYS 2 STARTS The analog inputs will display the input connection,
the temperature or pressure, and corresponding input
The last displays shown on the above list are for the
voltage such as:
accumulated run and start timers for each system. All
values can also be changed using the ↑ (UP) and ↓ S Y S 1 S U C T P R J 7 - 1 0
(Down) arrow keys, but under normal circumstances 2 . 1 V D C = 8 1 P S I G
would not be required or advised. After the last start
display, the microprocessor board will display the first
This example indicates that the system 1 suction pressure
programmable value under the PROGRAM key.
input is connected to plug 7 – pin 10 (J7-10) on the I/O
board. It indicates that the voltage is 2.1 VDC which
corresponds to 81 PSIG (5.6 bars) suction pressure.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
The digital inputs will display the input connection and TABLE 21 – I/O DIGITAL OUTPUTS
ON/OFF status such as: TB7-2 SYS 1 Compressor 1
TB7-3 SYS 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
F L O
W S W / R E M S T A R T
TB7-4 SYS 1 Compressor 2
J 13
- 5 I S O N
This indicates that the flow switch/remote start input is TB7-7 SYS 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
connected to plug 13- pin 5 (J13-5) on the microboard, TB10-2 SYS 2 Compressor 1
and is ON (ON = +30VDC unregulated input, OFF = TB10-3 SYS 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
0VDC input on digital inputs). TB10-4 SYS 2 Compressor 2
CONTROL INPUTS/OUTPUTS TB7-8 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 1
Tables 20 through 23 are a quick reference list providing TB7-9 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 2
the connection points and a description of the inputs and TB7-10 SYS 1 Condenser Fan Output 3
outputs respectively. All input and output connections TB10-8 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 1
pertain to the connections at the microboard.
TB10-9 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 2
TABLE 20 – I/O DIGITAL INPUTS TB10-10 SYS 2 Condenser Fan Output 3
TB8-2 Evaporator Heater
J13-2 Unit ON/OFF Switch
TB8-3 SYS 1 Alarm
J13-3 Load Limit Stage 2 on 3, 5 & 6 Comp. Units
TB9-2 SYS 2 Alarm
J13-4 Load Limit Stage 1
TB8-6 & 7 Evaporator Pump Starter
J13-5 Flow Switch and Remote Start/Stop
TB10-7 SYS 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
J13-6 Spare
Single System Select TABLE 22 – I/O ANALOG INPUTS
J13-7
(Jumper = Single Sys, No Jumper = Two Sys)
SYS 1 Suction Transducer
CR1
J13-8 J7-10 -or-
(Sys 1 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)
SYS 1 Low Pressure Switch
CR2
J13-10 Unit Type: Chiller = NO Jumper J11-12 to +24 VDC
(Sys 2 Motor Protector/High Pressure Cutout)
J11-12 YCUL Condensing Unit = Jumper J11-12 to +24 VDC
(Do NOT Use)
J7-11 SYS 1 Discharge Pressure Transducer (Optional)
J6-9 Ambient Air Temp. Sensor
J6-7 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
J6-8 Return Chilled Liquid Temp. Sensor
SYS 2 Suction Pressure Transducer
J9-10 -or-
SYS 2 Low Pressure Switch
J9-11
SYS 2 Discharge Pressure Transducer
(Optional)
9
J7-12 Unit/SYS 1 Voltage
J9-12 SYS 2 Voltage
J11-11 Remote Temperature Reset
TABLE 23 – I/O ANALOG OUTPUTS

N/A Not Applicable

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TB6 TB5 I/O BOARD

J15
TB1
TB7
J3
TB8
J5
IPU
BOARD
TB9
J6
J7
J8
TB10
J9
J10
J14 JP1
J13 J11
J12
LD12721
FIG. 61 – MICROBOARD LAYOUT

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
CHECKING INPUTS AND OUTPUTS TABLE 24 – OUTDOOR AIR SENSOR

TEMPERATURE/VOLTAGE/
CORRELATION
Digital Inputs
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. All digital inputs are VOLTAGE
connected to J13-1 of the I/O board. The term “digital” TEMP °F (Signal Input TEMP °C
refers to two states – either on or off. As an example, to Return)
when the flow switch is closed, 30VDC will be applied 0 0.7 -18
to J13, pin 5 (J13-5) of the I/O board. If the flow switch 5 0.8 -15
is open, 0VDC will then be present at J13-5.
10 0.9 -12
Pin 1 of J13 is an unregulated 30VDC source used to 15 1.0 -9
supply the DC voltage to the various user contacts, unit 20 1.1 -7
switch, flow switch, etc. This DC source is factory wired 25 1.2 -4
to XTBC1, terminal 13. Any switch or contact used as a 30 1.4 -1
digital input would be connected to this terminal, with 35 1.5 2
the other end connecting to its respective digital input on
40 1.7 4
the microboard. Any time a switch or contact is closed,
30VDC would be applied to that particular digital input. 45 1.8 7
Any time a switch or contact is open, 0VDC would be 50 2.0 10
applied to that particular digital input. 55 2.2 13
60 2.3 16
Typically, voltages of 24 – 36VDC could be measured 65 2.5 18
for the DC voltage on the digital inputs. This voltage
70 2.6 21
is in reference to ground. The unit case should be
75 2.8 24
sufficient as a reference point when measuring digital
input voltages. 80 2.9 27
85 3.1 29
Analog Inputs – Temperature 90 3.2 32
Refer to the unit wiring diagram. Temperature inputs are 95 3.4 35
connected to the microboard on plug J6. These analog 100 3.5 38
inputs represent varying DC signals corresponding to 105 3.6 41
varying temperatures. All voltages are in reference to 110 3.7 43
the unit case (ground). Following are the connections
115 3.8 46
for the temperature sensing inputs:
120 3.9 49
Outside Air Sensor 125 4.0 52
130 4.1 54
J6-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
J6-9 = VDC input signal to the microboard. 9
See Table 24 for voltage readings that corre-
spond to specific outdoor temperatures.
J6-3 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TABLE 25 – ENTERING/LEAVING CHILLED LIQUID Liquid & Refrigerant Sensor Test Points
TEMP. SENSOR, TEMPERATURE/ (Table 25)
VOLTAGE CORRELATION
Entering Chilled Liquid Sensor
VOLTAGE
J6-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
TEMP °F (Signal Input TEMP °C
J6-8 = VDC input signal to the I/O board. See
to Return)
Table 25 for voltage readings that correspond
10 1.33 -12 to specific liquid temperatures.
12 1.39 -11 J6-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
14 1.46 -10
16 1.51 -9 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature Sensor
18 1.58 -8 J6-4 = +5VDC regulated supply to sensor.
20 1.65 -7 J6-7 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See
22 1.71 -6 Table 25 for voltage readings that correspond
to specific liquid temperatures.
24 1.78 -4
J6-1 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) Return
26 1.85 -3
28 1.91 -2
30 1.98 -1
32 2.05 0
34 2.12 1
36 2.19 2
38 2.26 3
40 2.33 4
42 2.40 6
44 2.47 7
46 2.53 8
48 2.60 9
50 2.65 10
52 2.73 11
54 2.80 12
56 2.86 13
58 2.92 14
60 2.98 16
62 3.05 17
64 3.11 18
66 3.17 19
68 3.23 20
70 3.29 21
72 3.34 22
74 3.39 23
76 3.45 24
78 3.5 26
80 3.54 27

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Analog Inputs – Pressure TEST POINTS:

Refer to the unit wiring diagram. Pressure inputs Suction Pressure:
are connected to the microboard on plugs J7 and J9. System 1: ...........................Microboard J7-10 to J7-9
These analog inputs represent varying DC signals System 2: ...........................Microboard J9-10 to J9-9
corresponding to varying pressures. All voltages are in
Discharge Pressure:
reference to the unit case (ground).
System 1: ........................... Microboard J7-11 to J7-7
System 1 discharge and suction pressures will be System 2: ........................... Microboard J9-11 to J9-7
connected to J7 of the microboard. System 2 discharge
and suction pressure transducers will be connected to V = (Pressure in PSIG x .01) + .5
J9 of the microboard.
or
The discharge transducers are optional on all units. If the V = (Pressure in BARG x .145) + .5
discharge transducers are not installed, no connections
are made to the microboard and the discharge pressure where V = dc voltage output
readout on the display would be zero. Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
The suction pressure transducers are standard on all

YLAA’s. The suction pressure transducers have a range The I/O board connections for the Discharge
of 0 to 400 PSIG. The output will be linear from 0.5VDC Transducers:
to 4.5VDC over the 400 PSIG (27.5 barg) range.
System 1 Discharge Transducer
The discharge transducers have a range from 0 to 650 J7-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
PSIG. The output will be linear from 0.5VDC to 4.5VDC J7-11 = VDC input signal to the microboard. See
over the 600 PSIG (41.25 barg) range. The following is the formula above for voltage readings
the formula that can be used to verify the voltage output that correspond to specific discharge
of the transducer. All voltage reading are in reference to pressures.
ground (unit case). J7-7 = +5VDC return
J7-2 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC)
TABLE 26 – PRESSURE TRANSDUCERS
0-400 PSIG SUCTION 0-600 PSIG DISCHARGE System 2 Discharge Transducer
PRESSURE PRESSURE
TRANSDUCER TRANSDUCER
J9-6 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer.
J9-11 =VDC input signal to the microboard. See the
PRESSURE VOLTAGE PRESSURE VOLTAGE
formula above for voltage readings that
PSIG VDC PSIG VDC
correspond to specific discharge pressures.
0 0.5 0 0.5
J9-7 = +5VDC return
50 1.0 75 1.0
100 1.5 150 1.5
150 2.0 225 2.0 9
200 2.5 300 2.5
250 3.0 375 3.0
300 3.5 450 3.5
350 4.0 525 4.0
400 4.5 600 4.5
RED WIRE = 5V, BLACK WIRE = 0V, WHITE/GREEN WIRE = SIGNAL

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
The suction transducers have a range from 0 to 400 PSIG Digital Outputs
(27.5 barg). The output will be linear from 0.5VDC
Refer to the unit wiring diagram and Fig. 62. The digital
to 4.5VDC over the 400 PSIG (27.5 barg) range. The
outputs are located on TB7, TB8, and TB9 and TB-10 of
following is a formula that can be used to verify the
the microboard. ALL OUTPUTS ARE 120VAC with the
voltage output of the transducer. All voltage reading are
exception of TB8-6 to TB8-7 which are the contacts that
in reference to ground (unit case).
can be used for a remote evaporator pump start signal.
The voltage applied to either of these terminals would
V = (Pressure in PSIG x .02) + .5
be determined by field wiring.
or
V = (Pressure in barg x .29) + .5
Each output is controlled by the microprocessor by

switching 120VAC to the respective output connection
where V = dc voltage input to microprocessor board
energizing contactors, evaporator heater, and solenoids
Pressure = pressure sensed by transducer
according to the operating sequence (see Fig. 62).
The f ollowing are the I/O board connections for the
120VAC is supplied to the I/O board via connections
Suction Transducer:
at TB7-1, TB7-6, TB10-1, TB10-6, TB8-1 and TB9-1.
Fig. 62 illustrates the relay contact architecture on the
System 1 Suction Transducer
microboard.
J7-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer. SYS 1
J7-10 = VDC input signal to the microboard. TB7-2 COMP 1
See the formula above for voltage readings that cor- TB7-3 LLSV 1
respond to specific suction pressures. TB7
J7-9 = +5VDC return TB7-4
SYS 1
COMP 2
J7-1 = drain (shield connection = 0VDC) SYS 1
TB7-5 COMP 3
SYS 1
System 2 Suction Transducer TB7-7 HGSV
J9-5 = +5VDC regulated supply to transducer. TB7-8
SYS 1
FAN 2
J9-10 = VDC input signal to the microboard. TB7
SYS 1
See the formula above for voltage readings that cor- TB7-9 FAN 1
respond to specific suction pressures. SYS 1
TB7-10 FAN 3
J7-9 = +5VDC return
SYS 2
TB10-2 COMPR 1 (4)
TB10-3 LLSV 2
TB10
SYS 2
TB10-4 COMPR 2 (5)
SYS 2
TB10-5 COMPR 3 (6)
SYS 2
TB10-7 HGSV
TB10-8
TB10
TB10-9 SYS 2
FAN 2
SYS 2
TB10-10 FAN 4
TB8-6 EVAP
TB8-7 PUMP
TB8
HEAT EXCH
TB8-2 HEATER
LD12722
FIG. 62 – I/O BOARD RELAY CONTACT

ARCHITECTURE

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
OPTIONAL PRINTER INSTALLATION

The micropanel is capable of supplying a printout of Parts
chiller conditions or fault shutdown information at any The following parts are required:
given time. This allows operator and service personnel
to obtain data and system status with the touch of
the keypad. In addition to manual print selection, 1. One WEIGH-TRONIX model 1220 printer.
the micropanel will provide an automatic printout 2. 2.25" (5.7cm) wide desk top calculator paper.
whenever a fault occurs. Detailed explanation of the 3. 25 ft. (7.62m) maximum length of Twisted Pair
print function is given under “Print Key” located in the Shielded Cable (minimum 3 conductor), #18 AWG
“Keypad and Display” section of this IOM. stranded, 300V minimum insulation.
4. One 25-pin Cannon connector and shell.
Johnson Controls recommends the field tested WEIGH-
Connector: Cannon P/N DB-25P or equivalent.
TRONIX model 1220 printer (or former IMP 24). This
is a compact low cost printer that is ideal for service Shell: Cannon P/N DB-C2-J9.
work and data logging.
Assembly and Wiring
The WEIGH-TRONIX printer can be obtained by
contacting WEIGH-TRONIX for purchase information All components should be assembled and wired as
at: shown in Fig. 63. Strip the outside insulation back
several inches and individual wires about 3/8" (9.5 mm)
WEIGH-TRONIX to connect the cable at the Microboard. Do not connect
2320 Airport Blvd. the shield at the printer-end of the cable.
Santa Rosa, CA 95402
Phone: 1-800-982-6622 or 1-707-527-5555 Obtaining a Printout
(International Orders Only)
A printout is obtained by pressing the “PRINT” key on
The part number for the printer that is packaged the keypad and then pressing either the “OPER DATA”
specifically for YORK is P/N 950915576. The cable key or “HISTORY” key.
to connect the printer can either be locally assembled
from the parts listed, or ordered directly from WEIGH-
TRONIX under part number 287-040018.
Chiller Microboard Printer

TB3
TB3-3 TXD 2 RD 9
TB3-2 CTS 5 CTS
TB3-5 GND 7 SG
Shield (connect shield to Pin 5 Do not connect shield

of the connector. at printer end.
LD12723
FIG. 63 – PRINTER TO MICROBOARD ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TROUBLESHOOTING
TABLE 27 – TROUBLESHOOTING
PROBLEM CAUSE SOLUTION
No display on panel. 1. No 115VAC to 24 VAC 1a. Check wiring and fuse

Unit will not operate. Transformer 1FU

b. Check wiring emergency
stop contacts 5 to L of XTBC2
Terminal Block.

c. Replace Control Transformer
2. No 24VAC to Microboard 2. Check wiring Control

Transformer to Microboard.

3. Control Transformer defective, no 3. Replace Control Transformer
24VAC output.
4. Short in wire to temp. sensors 4. Unplug connections at IPU II

or pressure transducers. & I/O Board to isolate.
5. Defective IPU II & I/O Board 5. Replace IPU II & I/O Board
or the Display Board. or the Display Board.

Contact Johnson
Controls Service
before replacing
circuit boards!
“FLOW SWITCH/REM 1. No chilled liquid flow. 1. Check chilled liquid flow.

STOP NO RUN PERMISSIVE”
2. Flow switch improperly 2. Check that the flow switch
installed. is installed according to
manufacturer’s
instructions.
3. Defective flow switch. 3. Replace flow switch.
4. Remote cycling device open. 4. Check cycling devices

connected to terminals
13 and 14 of the XTBC1
Terminal Block.

“LOW SUCTION PRESSURE” 1. Improper suction pressure 1. Adjust per recommended
FAULT cutouts adjustments. settings.

2. Low refrigerant charge. 2. Repair leak if necessary
and add refrigerant.
3. Fouled filter dryer. 3. Change dryer/core.

CONT’D

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D)
“LOW SUCTION PRESSURE” 4. TXV defective. 4. Replace TXV.

FAULT (CONT’D)
5. Reduced flow of chilled 5. Check GPM (See “Limita
tions” liquid through the
cooler in Installation section).
Check operation of pump,
clean pump strainer, purge
chilled liquid system of air.
6. Defective suction pressure 6. Replace transducer/low

transducer/low pressure pressure switch or faulty
switch or wiring. wiring. Refer to “Service”
section for pressure/voltage
formula.
7. LLSV defective 7. Replace LLSV

“HIGH DISCHARGE 1. Condenser fans not operating 1. Check fan motor,

PRESSURE” FAULT or operating backwards. and contactors. Assure fan
blows air upward.
2. Too much refrigerant. 2. Remove refrigerant.
3. Air in refrigerant system. 3. Evacuate and recharge

system.
4. Defective discharge 4. Replace discharge pressure

pressure transducer. transducer. Refer to Service
section for pressure/voltage
formula.
“LOW LIQUID TEMP” 1. Improperly adjusted leaving 1. Re-program the leaving 9

FAULT chilled liquid temp. cutout chilled liquid temp. cutout.
(glycol only).
2. Micropanel setpoint/range 2. Re-adjust setpoint/range.

values improperly programmed.
3. Chilled liquid flow too low. 3. Increase chilled liquid flow –

refer to Limitations in Instal-
lation section.
4. Defective LWT or RWT sensor 4. Compare sensor against a

(assure the sensor is properly known good temperature
installed in the bottom of the well sensing device. Refer to
with a generous amount of heat) Service section for temp./
conductive compound). voltage table. CONT’D

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TROUBLESHOOTING (CONT’D)
“MP / HPCO” FAULT 1. Compressor internal motor 1. Verify refrigerant charge is

protector (MP) open. not low. Verify superheat
setting of °10 – 15 °F (5.6° –
8. 3 °C). Verify correct com-
pressor rotation. Verify
compressor is not over
loaded.
2. External overload tripped. 2. Determine cause and reset.

3. HPCO switch open. 3. See “High Press. Disch.”
Fault.

4. Defective HPCO switch. 4. Replace HPCO switch.

5. Defective CR relay. 5. Replace relay.
COMPRESSOR(S) WON’T 1. Demand not great enough. 1. No problem. Consult

START “Installation” Manual to aid
in understanding compres-
sor operation and capacity
control.
2. Defective water temperature 2. Compare the display with a

sensor. thermometer. Should be
within +/- 2 degrees. Refer
to Service section for RWT/
LWT temp./voltage table.
3. Contactor/Overload failure. 3. Replace defective part.
4. Compressor failure. 4. Diagnose cause of failure

and replace.
LACK OF COOLING EFFECT 1. Fouled evaporator surface. 1. Contact the local Johnson
Low suction pressure will Controls service
be observed. representative.
2. Improper flow through the 2. Reduce flow to within chiller

evaporator. design specs. See Limita-
tions in Installation section.
3. Low refrigerant charge. 3. Check subcooling and add

Low suction pressure will charge as needed.
be observed.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
SECTION 10 – MAINTENANCE
It is the responsibility of the equipment owner to provide CONDENSER COILS
maintenance on the system. Dirt should not be allowed to accumulate on the
condenser coil surfaces. Cleaning should be as often as
IMPORTANT necessary to keep coils clean.
If system failure occurs due to improper maintenance
during the warranty period, Johnson Controls will Exercise care when cleaning the coil
not be liable for costs incurred to return the system to so that the coil fins are not damaged.
satisfactory operation. The following is intended only as
a guide and covers only the chiller unit components. It
does not cover other related system components which
may or may not be furnished by Johnson Controls.
System components should be maintained according to
the individual manufacture’s recommendations as their
operation will affect the operation of the chiller. OPERATING PARAMETERS
Regular checks of the system should be preformed to
COMPRESSORS ensure that operating temperatures and pressures are
within limitations, and that the operating controls are
set within proper limits. Refer to the “Unit Operation”,
Oil Level check “Commissioning”, and “Installation” sections of this
The oil level can only be tested when the compressor is manual.
running in stabilized conditions, to ensure that there is
no liquid refrigerant in the lower shell of the compressor. ON-BOARD BATTERY BACK-UP
When the compressor is running at stabilized conditions, U5 is the Real Time Clock chip located on the 031-
the oil level must be between 1/4 and 3/4 in the oil sight 02630 IPU II board that maintains the date/time and
glass. stores customer programmed setpoints. The Real Time
Clock is a 128K bram, P/N 031-02565-000. The IPU
At shutdown, the oil level can fall to II board must have JP1 installed when the 128K bram
the bottom limit of the oil sight glass. is installed.
Use YORK “V” oil when adding oil.
Do not confuse JP1 on the IPU II (031-
02630) board with JP1 on the I/O
(031-02550) board.
Oil Analysis
The oil used in these compressors is pale yellow in color
(POE oil). If the oil color darkens or exhibits a change in
color, this may be an indication of contaminants in the
refrigerant system. If this occurs, an oil sample should PLATE AND FRAME HEAT EXCHANGER
be taken and analyzed. If contaminants are present, the (EVAPORATOR) HEATER
system must be cleaned to prevent compressor failure.
The Plate and Frame Heat Exchanger
Never use the scroll compressor to pump (evaporator) heater is 120VAC. Dis-
the refrigerant system down into a vac- connecting 120VAC power from the
uum. Doing so will cause internal arcing unit, at or below freezing tempera-
of the compressor motor which will re- tures, can result in damage to the 10
sult in failure of compressor. evaporator and unit as a result of the
chilled liquid freezing.
CONDENSER FAN MOTORS
Condenser fan motors are permanently lubricated and OVERALL UNIT INSPECTION
require no maintenance. In addition to the checks listed on this page, periodic
overall inspections of the unit should be accomplished
to ensure proper equipment operation. Items such as
loose hardware, component operation, refrigerant leaks,
unusual noises, etc. should be investigated and corrected
immediately.
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
Section 10 – MAINTENANCE
MICROCHANNEL COIL CLEANING Follow the three steps below for cleaning the coils:
The coil cleaning procedure for microchannel coils is 1. Remove surface debris such as dirt, leaves, in-
significantly different than tube and fin type coils. As sects, fibers, etc. with a vacuum cleaner having
such, care must be taken to understand the differences a soft attachment rather than a metal tube. Com-
to avoid damage to the microchannel coil. These pressed air blown from the inside out can also be
differences require a number of DO NOT’s that must used. When brushing debris off the face of the
be observed: coil a soft bristle (not wire) brush can be used.
Do not scrape the coil with the vacuum nozzle,
• DO NOT use coil cleaners or any chemical on a
air nozzle, or any other tool.
microchannel coil. This can cause severe damage
to the coils. 2. Rinse the coil with tap water. Do not use coil
cleaners. Rinse the coil from the inside out, run-
• DO NOT use a pressure washer to clean the coils.
ning water through every passage in the heat
While it is possible to clean a coil with a pressure
exchanger surface until it is clean. Use a gentle
washer, it’s also possible to destroy it.
spray from a spray nozzle with a plastic end or
• DO NOT contact the coil with a hard surface such put your finger on the end of the spray nozzle to
as a hose nozzle or metal vacuum nozzle or any reduce impact and provide a gentle spray.
other tool.
3. Because of the fin geometry, microchannel coils
retain water more than tube and fin style. It is
generally recommended to blow or vacuum out
the rinse water from the coils to speed drying and
prevent water pooling.

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
BACNET, MODBUS AND YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS
Data can be read and in some cases modified using a • RS-232: connect to TB3 - Network (RX) to TB3
serial communication BACnet, Modbus or YorkTalk (TXD); Network (TX) to TB3 (RXD); Network
2 network connection. This information allows (GND) to TB3 (GND)
communications of chiller operating parameters and
external control changes to setpoint, load limiting, and Refer to Fig. 64 “Micropanel Connections” for TB1,
start/stop commands. TB2 and TB3 locations.
BACnet and YorkTalk 2 RS485 networks are wired to In most cases, communication parameters will need
the + and - terminals of TB1 for port 1 communications. to be modified. Table 29 “Values Required for BAS
Modbus network connection has the option of RS232 or Communication” lists setup parameters for the available
RS485 connection for port 2 communications. Modbus protocols. Modification is accomplished by pressing
network is wired to either TB2 or TB3 as follows: the PROGRAM, DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW,
• RS-485: connect to TB2 - Network (-1) to TB2 DOWN ARROW, DOWN ARROW, and ENTER keys
(-1); Network (+1) to TB2 (+1) in sequence. The list below shows the displays for the
values that may be modified:
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS P2 PROTOCOL

XXXXX XXXXXXXXXX
DE MODIFIER OFFSET P2 MANUAL MAC

XX ADDRESS XXX
P1 PROTOCOL P2 BAUD RATE

XXXXXX XXXXX
P1 MANUAL MAC P2 PARITY

ADDRESS XXX XXXXX
P1 BAUD RATE P2 STOP BITS

XXXXX X
P1 PARITY P2 HW SELECT BIT

XXXXX XXXXX
P1 STOP BITS REAL TIME ERROR ##
X RESET 1 = YES, 0 = NO 0 10
Note: See Table 30 for error descriptions

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
035-02550-xxx I/O Board
FIG. 64 – MICROPANEL CONNECTIONS
The table below shows the minimum, maximum, and default values.
TABLE 28 – MINIMUM, MAXIMUM AND DEFAULT VALUES

DESCRIPTION MINIMUM MAXIMUM DEFAULT
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS -1 41943 -1
DE MODIFIER OFFSET -1 99 -1
P1 BAUD RATE 1200 76800 4800
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 76800, AUTO SELECTABLE
P2 BAUD RATE 1200 57600 1200
1200, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 SELECTABLE
P1, P2 MANUAL MAC
-1 127 -1
ADDRESS
P1, P2 PARITY NONE IGNORE NONE
NONE, EVEN, ODD, IGNORE SELECTABLE
P1 PROTOCOL BACNET API BACNET
BACNET, API SELECTABLE
P2 PROTOCOL TERMINAL MODBUS CLIENT API
TERMINAL, MODBUS IO, MODBUS SERVER, API, MODBUS CLIENT SELECTABLE
P1, P2 STOP BITS 1 2 1
RESET REAL TIME ERROR NO YES NO

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
The table below shows set-up requirements for each communication protocol.
TABLE 29 – VALUES REQUIRED FOR BAS COMMUNICATION

PROTOCOL
SETTING DESCRIPTION
BACNET MS/TP MODBUS RTU5 YORKTALK 2
DE MODIFIER ADDRESS 0 TO 41943 (3)
1 -1
DE MODIFIER OFFSET 0 TO 99 (4)
0 N/A
P1 PROTOCOL BACNET N/A N/A
P1 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS 0-127(1) N/A N/A
9600 TO 76800 OR AUTO
P1 BAUD RATE N/A N/A
SELECTABLE(1)
P1 PARITY NONE N/A N/A
P1 STOP BITS 1 N/A N/A
P2 PROTOCOL N/A MODBUS SVR N/A
P2 MANUAL MAC ADDRESS N/A 0-127 (1)
N/A
P2 BAUD RATE N/A 19,200(2) N/A
P2 PARITY N/A NONE (2)
N/A
P2 STOP BITS N/A 1 N/A
P2 HW SELECT BIT N/A RS-485 OR RS-232(1) N/A
RESET REAL TIME ERROR N/A N/A N/A
P1 HW SELECT BIT N/A N/A N/A
CHILLER ID N/A N/A 0
1
AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
2
OR OTHER AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
3
NUMBER IS MULTIPLIED BY 100, SET AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
4
NUMBER IS ADDED TO DE MODIFIER ADDRESS, SET AS REQUIRED BY NETWORK
5
UNIT OPERATING SOFTWARE VERSION C.MMC.13.03 OR LATER REQUIRED FOR MODBUS PROTOCOL
NOTE: REBOOT REQUIRED (CYCLE POWER) AFTER SETTINGS ARE CHANGED.

The table below shows the real time error numbers that may be encountered during communication setup and a
description of each.
TABLE 30 – REAL TIME ERROR NUMBERS

ERROR NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
(##)
0 ALL OK
1 DATUM TYPE OK TEST FAILED
2 ENGLISH TEXT TOO LONG
3 FLOATING POINT EXCEPTION
4 GET PACKET FAILED
5 GET TYPE FAILED
6 INVALID UNIT CONVERSION
7 INVALID HARDWARE SELECTION 10
8 REAL TIME FAULT
9 SPANISH TEXT TOO LONG
10 THREAD EXITED
11 THREAD FAILED
12 THREAD STALLED
13 IO BOARD RESET
14 BRAM INVALID
15 BACNET SETUP FAILED

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
BACnet and Modbus Communications Communications Data Map Notes:

(See Table 31)
Chiller data that can be read and modified using
specific BACnet or Modbus Register Addresses; and 1. I PU II based units are configured for Native BACnet
the data associated with the addresses, is outlined in the MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications.
following description: Microgateway or E-Link not required for these
two communication protocols.
ANALOG WRITE POINTS
This data can be read and modified using a BACnet or
Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register 2. BACnet
Object Types: 0= Analog In, 1 =
Address for these points is 1025 + AV #. Analog Out, 2= Analog Value, 3= Bina-
ry In, 4 = Binary Output, 5= Binary Value,
BINARY WRITE POINTS 8= Device, 15 = Alarm Notification (0 -127 are
This data can be read and modified using a BACnet or reserved ASHRAE Objects).
Modbus network connection. The Modbus Register
Address for these points is 1537 + BV #. 3. W
C= Inches of water column; CFM = Cubic Feet
per Minute; FPM = Feet per Minute: PSI = Lbs
ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS per square inch; Pa = Pascals; kPa = Kilopascals;
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus PPM = Part per Million; kJ/kg = Kilojoules per
network connection and can NOT be modified using Kilogram.
this connection. The Modbus Register Address for these
points is 513 + AI #.
4. Water Cooled Scroll units use the same firmware
as Air Cooled Scroll units, ignoring Fan Control.
BINARY MONITOR ONLY POINTS
This data can be read using a BACnet or Modbus
network connection and can NOT be modified using
this connection. The Modbus Register Address for these
points is 1281 + BI #.
Refer to Table 31 for complete list of BACnet and

Modbus registers.
The latest data map information is

listed on the Johnson Controls Equip-
ment Integration website.

2/25/2009
YCAL/YCUL/YCWL/YLAA IPU II Native Modbus and BACnet MS/TP Data Maps Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
ITEM Version Date York PN Check Sum Comments
1 C.MMC.13.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-001 Standard with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
2 C.MMC.15.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-002 Basildon with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
3 C.MMC.14.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-003 MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
4 C.MMC.16.00 29-Nov-06 031-02755-004 Basildon MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550
5 C.MMC.13.02 17-Oct-08 031-02755-001 Standard Micro Board 031-02550-xxx . Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
6 C.MMC.14.02 17-Oct-08 031-02755-003 MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
7 C.MMC.16.02 17-Oct-08 031-02755-004 Basildon MMHP with Board: 031-02630-xxx w/ 031-02550 Fix native Modbus communications. Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
8
9
10
BACnet Point List Code

MODBUS MODBUS Data READ
ITEM REF BACnet NAME Object/Inst ENG UNITS POINT DESCRIPTION S=Standard; O = Optional; N = Not Available
ADDRESS Type Supported WRITE
NUM ance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1 SEE NOTE 5 SEE NOTE 1
3 ANALOG WRITE POINTS
4 REM_SETP AV_1 1026 03,06,16 F° R/W Setpoint Cooling Setpoint(HP Only), 99 = Auto; (40°F - 70°F)
5 SP_REM_SP_S1 AV_2 1027 03,06,16 PSIG R/W Sys 1 Setpoint (Suction Pressure Control units only)
6 LOAD_LIMIT AV_3 1028 03,06,16 index R/W Load Limit Stage (0, 1, 2)
7 REM_CR AV_4 1029 03,06,16 F° R/W Cooling Range (DAT Mode Only)
8 SP_REM_SP_S2 AV_5 1030 03,06,16 PSIG R/W Sys 2 Setpoint (Suction Pressure Control)
9 REM_SP_HEAT AV_6 1031 03,06,16 F° R/W Heating Setpoint (HP Only), 999 = Auto (95°F - 122°F)
10 HP_MODE AV_7 1032 03,06,16 index R/W Mode (HP Only) (0=Panel, 1=Cooling, 2=Heating)
11
12 BINARY WRITE POINTS
13 START_STOP BV_1 1538 01,03,05,15,06, 0, 1 R/W Stop Start Command
16
01,03,05,15,06,
14 SS_SYS1 BV_2 1539 0, 1 R/W Sys 1 Start/Stop ( Suction Pressure (SP) Control Only)
16
01,03,05,15,06,
15 SS_SYS2 BV_3 1540 0, 1 R/W Sys 2 Start/Stop ( Suction Pressure (SP) Control Only)
16 ANALOG READ ONLY POINTS
17 LCHLT AI_1 514 03,04 F° R Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
18 RCHLT AI_2 515 03,04 F° R Return Chilled Liquid Temp
19 DAT AI_3 516 03,04 F° R Condensing Unit Models Only
TABLE 31 - BACNET AND MODBUS COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP
20 S1_SUCT_TEMP AI_4 517 03,04 F° R Electronic Expansion Valve Models Only

21 OAT AI_5 518 03,04 F° R Ambient Air Temperature
22 S1_SUCT_SHEAT AI_6 519 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Suction Superheat ( EEV Models Only)
23 S1_RUN_TIME AI_7 520 03,04 seconds R Sys 1 Run Time (seconds)
24 S1_SUCT_PR AI_8 521 03,04 PSIG R Sys 1 Suction Pressure
25 S1_DSCH_PR AI_9 522 03,04 PSIG R Sys 1 Discharge Pressure
27 S1_CIR_TEMP AI_10 523 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temp (R-407c Models Only)
28 S1_DEF_TEMP AI_11 524 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Defrost Temperature (HP Only)
29 S1_EEV_OUT AI_12 525 03,04 F° R System 1 EEV Output % ( EEV Models Only)
30 S1_AR_TIMER AI_13 526 03,04 seconds R Sys 1 Anti-Recycle Timer
31 AC_TIMER AI_14 527 03,04 seconds R Anti-Coincident Timer
32 S2_SUCT_TEMP AI_15 528 03,04 °F R System 2 Suction Temp ( EEVModels Only)
33 S2_RUN_TIME AI_16 529 03,04 seconds R Sys 2 Run Time (seconds)
34 S2_SUCT_PR AI_17 530 03,04 PSIG R Sys 2 Suction Pressure
35 S2_DSCH_PR AI_18 531 03,04 PSIG R Sys 2 Discharge Pressure
36 S2_CIR_TEMP AI_19 532 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature(R-407c Only)
37 S2_DEF_TEMP AI_20 533 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Defrost Temperature (HP Only)
38 S2_SUCT_SH AI_21 534 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Suction SuperHeat (EEV Models Only)
39 S2_AR_TIMER AI_22 535 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer
40 S2_EEV_OUT AI_23 536 03,04 seconds R Sys 2 Suction Superheat ( EEV Models Only)
Continued on next page

195
Property of JCI/York International. Subject to change without notice

Mid Market Native Bacnet_Modbus Middle Market IPU II NATIVE BACnet _Modbus Data Maps_ Rev A_06.xls Page 1 of 3
10
196
2/25/2009

NUM ance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
41 NUM_COMPS AI_24 537 03,04 count R Number of Compressors
42 S1_OP_CODE AI_25 538 03,04 index R Sys 1 Operational Code (Definition
(See Tablein
A &Table
B) 32)
43 S1_FLT_CODE AI_26 539 03,04 index R Sys 1 Fault Code (Definition
(See TableinA &Table
B) 32)
44 S2_OP_CODE AI_27 540 03,04 index R Sys 2 Operational Code (Definition
(See Table in
A &Table
B) 32)
45 S2_FLT_CODE AI_28 541 03,04 index R Sys 2 Fault Code (Definition

(See Tablein
A &Table
B) 32)
46 S1_DBG_CODE AI_29 542 03,04 index R Sys 1 Debug Code
47 S1_FAN_STAGE AI_30 543 03,04 count R Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage
Continued from previous page
48 S2_DBG_CODE AI_31 544 03,04 index R Sys 2 Debug Code

49 S2_FAN_STAGE AI_32 545 03,04 count R Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage
Unit Control Mode (0=Leaving Water, 1=Return Water, 2=Discharge Air, 3=Suction Press,
CONTROL_MODE AI_33 546 03,04 count R
50 4=Cooling, 5=Heating)
51 AR_TIME AI_34 547 03,04 seconds R Anti-Recycle Time (Programmed)
52 LCHLT_CUT AI_35 548 03,04 F° R Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout
53 LOW_AMB_CUT AI_36 549 03,04 F° R Low Ambient Temperature Cutout
54 SUCT_P_CO_HT AI_37 550 03,04 PSIG R Low Suction Pressure Cutout Heating (HP Only)
55 L_SUCT_P_CO AI_38 551 03,04 PSIG R Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Cooling on HP units )
56 H_DSCH_P_CO AI_39 552 03,04 PSIG R High Discharge Pressure Cutout
57 COOL_SETP AI_40 553 03,04 F° R Setpoint
58 SP_SETP_S1 AI_41 554 03,04 F° R Setpoint 1 (SP Control)
59 CONTROL_RG AI_42 555 03,04 F° R Cooling Range
60 SP_CTL_RG_S1 AI_43 556 03,04 F° R Cooling Range 1 (SP Control)
61 SP_SETP_S2 AI_44 557 03,04 F° R Setpoint 2 (SP Control)
62 HEAT_SETP AI_45 558 03,04 F° R Heating Setpoint (HP Only)
63 SP_CTL_RG_S2 AI_46 559 03,04 F° R Cooling Range 2 (SP Control)
64 HEAT_RANGE AI_47 560 03,04 F° R Heating Range (HP Only)
65 S1_DSCH_TEMP AI_48 561 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Discharge Temperature (EEV Only)
66 S1_DSCH_SHEAT AI_49 562 03,04 F° R Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV Only)
67 S2_DSCH_TEMP AI_50 563 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Discharge Temperature (EEV Only)
68 S2_DSCH_SH AI_51 564 03,04 F° R Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV Only)
69 LEAVING_HOT AI_52 565 03,04 F° R Leaving Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
70 RETURN_HOT AI_53 566 03,04 F° R Return Liquid Hot Temp (R-410a)
71
72
74 BINARY MONITOR ONLY POINTS
75 S1_ALARM BI_1 1282 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Alarm
76 S2_ALARM BI_2 1283 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Alarm
77 EVAP_HTR BI_3 1284 01,02,03 0, 1 R Evaporator Heater Status
78 EVAP_PUMP BI_4 1285 01,02,03 0, 1 R Evaporator Pump Status
79 S1_C1_RUN BI_5 1286 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Comp 1 Run
81 S1_LLSV BI_7 1288 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
82 S1_MODE_SV BI_8 1289 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP Only)
83 S1_HGBV BI_9 1290 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve
84 S1_BHS BI_10 1291 01,02,03 0, 1 R Bivalent Heat Source (HP Only)
87 S2_LLSV BI_13 1294 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve
88 S2_MODE_SV BI_14 1295 01,02,03 0, 1 R Sys 2 Mode Solenoid Valve (HP Only)
89 LEAD_SYS BI_15 1296 01,02,03 0, 1 R Lead System (0 = Sys 1, 1 = Sys 2)
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
92 CH_LIQ_TYPE BI_18 1299 01,02,03 0, 1 R Chilled Liquid Type (0=Water, 1=Glycol)
93 AMB_MODE BI_19 1300 01,02,03 0, 1 R Ambient Control Mode (0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb)

2/25/2009

NUM ance 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
94 CNTL_MODE BI_20 1301 01,02,03 0, 1 R Local/Remote Control Mode (0=Local, 1=Remote)
95 DATA_UNIT BI_21 1302 01,02,03 0, 1 R Units (0=Imperial, 1=SI)
96 AUTO_LL BI_22 1303 01,02,03 0, 1 R Lead/Lag Control Mode (0=Manual, 1=Auto)
TABLE A TABLE B
JOHNSON CONTROLS
Code Operational Codes Code Fault Codes
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
0 No Abnormal Condition 0 No Fault

1 Unit Switch Off 1 VAC Under Voltage
2 System Switch Off 2 Low Ambient Temperature
3 Lock-Out 3 High Ambient Temperature
4 Unit Fault 4 Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp
5 System Fault 5 High Discharge Pressure

6 Remote Shutdown 6 High Differential Oil Pressure
7 Daily Schedule Shutdown 7 Low Suction Pressure
8 No Run Permissive 8 High Motor Current `
9 No Cool Load 9 LLSV Not On
10 Anti-Coincidence Timer Active 10 Low Battery Warning
11 Anti-Recycle Timer Active 11 High Oil Temperature
12 Manual Override 12 High Discharge Temperature
13 Suction Limiting 13 Improper Phase Rotation
14 Discharge Limiting 14 Low Motor Current / MP / HPCO
15 15 Motor Current Unbalanced
16 Load Limiting 16 Low Differential Oil Pressure
17 Compressor(s) Running 17 Ground Fault
18 18 MP/HPCO Fault
19 19 Low Evaporator Temperature
20 20 Incorrect Refrigerant Programmed
21 21 Power Failure, Manual Reset Required
22 22 Unit Motor Current
23 23 Low Superheat
24 24 Sensor Fault
25 25
26 26 MP/HPCO Inhibit
27 27
28 28
29 29
30 30
NOTE: Note that these tables of FAULT and OPERATIONAL Codes are for all DX products.
NOTES
1 The IPU II based YCAL /YCUL Units are configured for Native BACnet MS/TP and Modbus RTU communications. The Microgateway product is not required for these 2 interfaces
2
3 BACnet Object Types: 0= Analog In, 1 = Analog Out, 2= Analog Value, 3= Binary In, 4 = Binary Output, 5= Binary Value, 8= Device, 15 = Alarm Notification ( 0 -127 are reserved ASHRAE Objects)
4 WC= Inches of water column; CFM = Cubic Feer per Minute; FPM = Feet per Minute: PSI = Lbs per square inch; Pa = Pascals; kPa = Kilopascals; PPM = Part Per Million; kJ/kg = Kilojoules per Kilogram
5 See the applicable Middle Market Chiller Operations Manual for more details
6 The YCWL uses the same firmware as a YCAL , it just ignores Fan Control
7
8
9
10
197

10
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS
Received Data (Control Data) Transmitted Data
The unit receives eight data values from the MicroGateway After receiving a valid transmission from the MicroGateway
or E-Link. The first four are analog values and the last four or E-Link, the unit will transmit either operational data or his-
are digital values. These eight data values are used as con- tory buffer data depending on the “History Buffer Request”
trol parameters when in REMOTE mode. When the unit is on ENG PAGE 10. Data must be transmitted for every page
in LOCAL mode, these eight values are ignored. If the unit under feature 54. If there is no value to be sent to a particular
receives no valid YorkTalk 2 transmission for 5 minutes it page, a zero will be sent. Table 32 “Yorktalk 2 Communica-
will revert back to all local control values. Table 32 “Yorktalk tions Data Map” shows the data values and page listings
2 Communications Data Map” lists the control parameters. for this unit.
These values are found under feature 54 in the MicroGateway
or E-Link. The latest point map information is
listed on the Johnson Controls Equip-
ment Integration website.

YCAL/YCWL/YLAA Middle Market w/ 2050, 2550 York Talk 2 MicroGateway / ELINK Micro Board: 031-02050/02550
Item Ref. Version Date YORK P N Checksum Baud COM M ENT S
1 C.MMC.03.02 031-02049-001 944D 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
2 C.MMC.03.01 031-02049-001 964B 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
3 C.MMC.03.00 031-02049-001 2226 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02050-xxx
4 C.MMC.13.xx flash xxxx 4800 YCAL Micro Board 031-02550-xxx, IPU 2 board.
5 C.MMC.13.xx flash xxxx 4800 YCWL ( water cooled version) Micro Board 031-02550-xxx, IPU 2 board.
6 C.MMC.13.02 flash xxxx 4800 Micro Board 031-02550-xxx . Fix native Modbus communications (SCR . Fix Café Metric functionality (SCR-766)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
8
9
10
Use ASCII page column for interfaces utilizing an ASCII XL Translator or MicroGateway to communicate to a chiller LINC
ENG ASCII GPIC York Talk ISN LINC York Talk N2 ENG
PAGE PAGE Object Point Descriptive Character Address POINT LIST CODE: S = STANDARD O = OPTIONAL N = NOT AVAILABLE PAGE
REF REF T ype T ype T ext Position POINT LIST DESCRIPT ION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 REF
P0 3 P0 1 A. Control ADF 1 Setpoint S S S S S P0 3
P0 4 P0 2 A. Control ADF 2 Load Limit Stage (0, 1, 2) S S S S S P0 4
P0 5 P0 3 A. Control ADF 3 Heating Setpoint (HP and YCW L HP) O O O O O P0 5
P0 6 P0 4 A. Control ADF 4 Mode (HP and YCW L HP only) (0=Panel, 1= Cooling, 2 = Heating) O O O O O P0 6
P0 7 P0 5 D. Control BD 1 Start/Stop Command S S S S S P0 7
P0 8 P0 6 D. Control BD 2 P08
P0 9 P0 7 D. Control BD 3 P09
P1 0 P0 8 D. Control BD 4 History Buffer Request S S S S S P1 0
P1 1 P0 9 A. Monitor 8 - 11 ADF 5 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp S S S S S P11
P1 2 P1 0 A. Monitor 12 - 15 ADF 6 Return Chilled Liquid Temp S S S S S P12
P13 P11 A. Monitor 16 - 19 ADF 7 Leaving Hot Liquid Temp (R-410a) Heat Mode Only O O O O O P13
P1 4 P1 2 A. Monitor 20 - 23 ADF 8 Discharge Air Temp ( Cond Unit) Return Hot Liquid Temp (410a- Heat Mod S S S S S P1 4
P15 P13 A. Monitor 24 - 27 ADF 9 Leaving Liquid Temp Hot (R-410a) O O O O O P15
TABLE 32 - YORKTALK 2 COMMUNICATIONS DATA MAP
P1 6 P1 4 A. Monitor 28 - 31 ADF 10 Ambient Air Temperature S S S S S P1 6

P17 P15 A. Monitor 32 - 35 ADF 11 Sys 1 Suction Superheat ( EEV only) O O O O O P17
P1 8 P1 6 A. Monitor 36 - 39 ADF 12 Sys 1 Run Time (seconds) S S S S S P1 8
P1 9 P1 7 A. Monitor 40 - 43 ADF 13 Sys 1 Suction Pressure S S S S S P1 9
P2 0 P1 8 A. Monitor 44 - 47 ADF 14 Sys 1 Discharge Pressure S S S S S P2 0
P2 1 P1 9 A. Monitor 48 - 51 ADF 15 Sys 1 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature(R-407c Only) S S S S S P2 1
P22 P20 A. Monitor 52 - 55 ADF 16 P22
P23 P21 A. Monitor 56 - 59 ADF 17 Sys 1 EEV Output % (EEV only) O O O O O P23
P2 4 P2 2 A. Monitor 60 - 63 ADF 18 Sys 1 Anti- Recycle Timer S S S S S P2 4
P2 5 P2 3 A. Monitor 64 - 67 ADF 19 Anti-Coincident Timer S S S S S P2 5
P26 P24 A. Monitor 68 - 71 ADF 20 Sys Suction Temp ( EEV only) O O O O O P26
P2 7 P2 5 A. Monitor 72 - 75 ADF 21 Sys 2 Run Time (seconds) S S S S S P2 7
P2 8 P2 6 A. Monitor 76 - 79 ADF 22 Sys 2 Suction Pressure S S S S S P2 8
P2 9 P2 7 A. Monitor 80 - 83 ADF 23 Sys 2 Discharge Pressure S S S S S P2 9
P3 0 P28 A. Monitor 84 - 87 ADF 24 Sys 2 Cooler Inlet Refrigerant Temperature (R-407c systems Only) S S S S S P3 0
P3 1 P2 9 A. Monitor 88 - 91 ADF 25 Sys 2 Defrost Temperature ( HP only) O O O O O P3 1
P32 P30 A. Monitor 92 - 95 ADF 26 Sys 2 Suction Superheat (EEV only) O O O O O P32
P3 3 P3 1 A. Monitor 96 - 99 ADF 27 Sys 2 Anti-Recycle Timer S S S S S P3 3
P34 P32 A. Monitor 1 00 - 103 ADF 28 Sys 2 EEV Output % (EEV only) O O O O O P34
P3 5 P3 3 A. Monitor 104 - 107 ADF 29 Number of Compressors S S S S S P3 5
P3 6 P3 4 D. Monitor 108 BD 5 Sys 1 Alarm S S S S S P3 6
P3 7 P3 5 D. Monitor 109 BD 6 Sys 2 Alarm S S S S S P3 7
P3 8 P3 6 D. Monitor 110 BD 7 Evaporator Heater Status S S S S S P3 8
P3 9 P3 7 D. Monitor 111 BD 8 Evaporator Pump Status S S S S S P3 9
P4 0 P3 8 D. Monitor 112 BD 9 Sys 1 Compressor 1 Run S S S S S P4 0
P4 1 P3 9 D. Monitor 113 BD 1 0 Sys 2 Compressor 1 Run S S S S S P4 1
P4 2 P4 0 D. Monitor 114 BD 1 1 Sys 1 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve S S S S S P4 2

199
10
ENG ASCII GPIC York Talk ISN LINC York Talk N2 ENG
200
PAGE PAGE Object Point Descriptive Character Address POINT LIST CODE: S = STANDARD O = OPTIONAL N = NOT AVAILABLE PAGE
REF REF T ype T ype T ext Position POINT LIST DESCRIPT ION 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 REF
P43 P41 D. Monitor 115 BD 12 Sys 1 Hot Gas Bypass Valve S S S S S P43
P4 6 P4 4 D. Monitor 118 BD 1 5 Sys 2 Liquid Line Solenoid Valve S S S S S P4 6
P4 7 P4 5 D. Monitor 119 BD 1 6 Lead System (0 = Sys 1, 1 = Sys 2) S S S S S P4 7
P5 0 P4 8 D. Monitor 122 BD 1 9 Chilled Liquid Type (0=W ater, 1=Glycol) S S S S S P50
P5 1 P4 9 D. Monitor 123 BD 2 0 Ambient Control Mode (0=Std Amb, 1=Low Amb) S S S S N P5 1
P5 2 P5 0 D. Monitor 124 BD 2 1 Local/Remote Control Mode (0=Local, 1=Remote) S S S S S P5 2

P5 3 P5 1 D. Monitor 125 BD 2 2 Units (0=Imperial, 1=SI) S S S S S P5 3
P5 4 P5 2 D. Monitor 126 BD 2 3 Lead/Lag Control Mode (0=Manual, 1=Auto) S S S S S P5 4
P5 5 P5 3 D. Monitor 127 BD 2 4 Sys 2 Hot Gas Bypass Valve S S S S S P5 5

P5 6 P5 4 Code Monitor 128 ADI 1 *Sys 1 Operational Code S S S S S P5 6
P5 7 P5 5 Code Monitor 129 ADI 2 *Sys 1 Fault Code S S S S S P5 7
P5 8 P5 6 Code Monitor 130 ADI 3 *Sys 2 Operational Code S S S S S P5 8
P5 9 P5 7 Code Monitor 131 ADI 4 *Sys 2 Fault Code S S S S S P5 9
P60 P58 Code Monitor 132 ADI 5 S S S S S P60
P6 1 P5 9 Code Monitor 133 ADI 6 Sys 1 Condenser Fan Stage S S S S S P6 1
P62 P60 Code Monitor 134 ADI 7 S S S S S P62
P6 3 P6 1 Code Monitor 135 ADI 8 Sys 2 Condenser Fan Stage S S S S S P6 3
P64 P62 Code Monitor 136 ADI 9 P64
P65 P63 Code Monitor 137 ADI 10 Unit Control Mode (0=Lv W tr, 1=Ret W tr, 2=Dis Air, 3=SP, 4=Cool, 5=Heat) S S S S S P65
P6 6 P6 4 A. Monitor 138 - 141 ADF 30 Anti-Recycle Time (Programmed) S S S S S P6 6
P6 7 P6 5 A. Monitor 142 - 145 ADF 31 Leaving Chilled Liquid Temp Cutout S S S S S P67
P6 8 P6 6 A. Monitor 146 - 149 ADF 32 Low Ambient Temperature Cutout S S S S S P6 8
P6 9 P6 7 A. Monitor 150 - 153 ADF 33 Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Heating HP Only) S S S S S P6 9
P7 0 P6 8 A. Monitor 154 - 157 ADF 34 Low Suction Pressure Cutout (Cooling HP only) S S S S S P7 0
P7 1 P6 9 A. Monitor 158 - 161 ADF 35 High Discharge Pressure Cutout S S S S S P7 1
P7 2 P7 0 A. Monitor 162 - 165 ADF 36 Setpoint (local) S S S S S P7 2
P7 3 P7 1 A. Monitor 166 - 169 ADF 37 Cooling Range S S S S S P7 3
P7 4 P7 2 A. Monitor 170 - 173 ADF 38 Setpoint 2 ( SP Control), Heating Setpoint ( HP and YCW L HP only) O O O O O P7 4
P7 5 P7 3 A. Monitor 174 - 177 ADF 39 Cool Range Setpoint 2 (SP Control), Heat Range (HP and YCW L HP only) O O O O O P7 5
P76 P74 A. Monitor 178 - 181 ADF 40 Sys 1 Discharge Temp (EEV only) O O O O O P76
P77 P75 A. Monitor 182 - 185 ADF 41 Sys 1 Discharge Superheat (EEV only) O O O O O P77
P78 P76 A. Monitor 186 - 189 ADF 42 Sys 2 Discharge Temp (EEV only) O O O O O P78
P79 P77 A. Monitor 190 - 193 ADF 43 Sys 2 Discharge Superheat (EEV only) O O O O O P79
P80 P78 D. Monitor 194 BD 25 P80
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
JOHNSON CONTROLS
NOTE: The Appropriate Product Code Listing Summary Should Accompany Document
ENG ASCII Operational Code ENG ASCII Fault Code
PAGE PAGE PAGE PAGE
P56 P54 C_OPER.CODE P57 P55 C_FAULT .CODE
0 0 No Abnormal Condition 0 0 No Fault Code
1 1 Unit Switch Off 1 1 n /a
2 2 System Switch Off 2 2 Low Ambient Temperature
3 3 Lock-Out 3 3 n /a
4 4 Unit Fault 4 4 Low Leaving Chilled Liquid Temperature
5 5 System Fault 5 5 High Discharge Pressure
JOHNSON CONTROLS
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
6 6 Remote Shutdown 6 6 n /a
7 7 Daily Schedule Shutdown 7 7 Low Suction Pressure
8 8 No Run Permissive 8 8 n /a
9 9 No Cool Load 9 9 n /a
10 10 Anti-Coincidence Timer Active 10 10 n /a
11 11 Anti-Recycle Timer Active 11 11 n /a

12 12 Manual Override 12 12 n /a
13 13 Suction Limiting 13 13 n /a
14 14 Discharge Limiting 14 14 n /a
15 15 n /a 15 15 n /a
16 16 Load Limiting 16 16 n /a
17 17 Compressor(s) Running 17 17 n /a
18 18 Heat Pump Load Limiting ( HP Only) 18 18 MP / HPCO Fault
19 19 Low Evaporator Temperature
20 20 n/a
21 21 n/a
22 22 Unit Motor Current
23 23 Low Superheat
24 24 Sensor Fault
25 25 Discharge Inhibit
26 26 MP/HPCO Inhibit
27 27 Pump Trip
28 28 Pump Fail Make Flow
201
10
FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION
TEMPERATURE CONVERSION CHART
CHART
Temperature Conversion Chart - Temperature Conversion Chart -

Actual Temperatures Differential Temperatures
°F = °C °C = °F °F = °C °C = °F
0 -17.8 -18 -0.4 0 0 0 0
4 -15.6 -16 3.2 4 2.2 2 3.6
8 -13.3 -14 6.8 8 4.4 4 7.2
12 -11.1 -12 10.4 12 6.7 6 10.8
16 -8.9 -10 14 16 8.9 8 14.4
20 -6.7 -8 17.6 20 11.1 10 18
24 -4.4 -6 21.2 24 13.3 12 21.6
28 -2.2 -4 24.8 28 15.6 14 25.2
32 0.0 -2 28.4 32 17.8 16 28.8
36 2.2 0 32 36 20 18 32.4
40 4.4 2 35.6 40 22.2 20 36
44 6.7 4 39.2 44 24.4 22 39.6
48 8.9 6 42.8 48 26.7 24 43.2
52 11.1 8 46.4 52 28.9 26 46.8
56 13.3 10 50 56 31.1 28 50.4
60 15.6 12 53.6 60 33.3 30 54
64 17.8 14 57.2
68 20.0 16 60.8
72 22.2 18 64.4 Pressure Conversion Chart -
76 24.4 20 68 Gauge or Differential
80 26.7 22 71.6
84 28.9 24 75.2 PSI = BAR BAR = PSI
88 31.1 26 78.8 20 1.38 1.5 21.8
92 33.3 28 82.4 30 2.07 2 29
96 35.6 30 86 40 2.76 2.5 36.3
100 37.8 32 89.6 50 3.45 3 43.5
104 40.0 34 93.2 60 4.14 3.5 50.8
108 42.2 36 96.8 70 4.83 4 58
112 44.4 38 100.4 80 5.52 4.5 65.3
116 46.7 40 104 90 6.21 5 72.5
120 48.9 42 107.6 100 6.9 5.5 79.8
124 51.1 44 111.2 110 7.59 6 87
128 53.3 46 114.8 120 8.28 6.5 94.3
132 55.6 48 118.4 130 8.97 7 101.5
136 57.8 50 122 140 9.66 7.5 108.8
140 60.0 52 125.6 150 10.34 8 116
144 62.2 54 129.2 160 11.03 8.5 123.3
148 64.4 56 132.8 170 11.72 9 130.5
152 66.7 58 136.4 180 12.41 9.5 137.8
156 68.9 60 140 190 13.1 10 145
160 71.1 62 143.6 200 13.79 10.5 152.3
164 73.3 64 147.2 210 14.48 11 159.5
168 75.6 66 150.8 220 15.17 11.5 166.8
172 77.8 68 154.4 230 15.86 12 174
176 80.0 70 158 240 16.55 12.5 181.3
180 82.2 72 161.6 250 17.24 13 188.5
184 84.4 74 165.2 260 17.93 13.5 195.8
188 86.7 76 168.8 270 18.62 14 203
192 88.9 78 172.4 280 19.31 14.5 210.3
196 91.1 80 176 290 20 15 217.5
200 93.3 82 179.6 300 20.69 15.5 224.8
204 95.6 84 183.2 310 21.38 16 232
208 97.8 86 186.8 320 22.07 16.5 239.3
212 100.0 88 190.4 330 22.76 17 246.5
216 102.2 90 194 340 23.45 17.5 253.8
220 104.4 92 197.6 350 24.14 18 261
224 106.7 94 201.2 360 24.83 18.5 268.3
228 108.9 96 204.8 370 25.52 19 275.5
232 111.1 98 208.4 380 26.21 19.5 282.8
236 113.3 100 212 390 26.9 20 290
240 115.6 102 215.6 400 27.59 20.5 297.3
244 117.8 104 219.2

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
R410A
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE CHART
PSIG TEMP ˚F PSIG TEMP ˚F
0 -60 78 20
2 -58 80 21
4 -54 85 24
6 -50 90 26
8 -46 95 29
10 -42 100 32
12 -39 105 34
14 -36 110 36
16 -33 115 39
18 -30 120 41
20 -28 125 43
22 -26 130 45
24 -24 135 47
26 -20 140 49
28 -18 145 51
30 -16 150 53
32 -14 160 57
34 -12 170 60
36 -10 180 64
38 -8 190 67
40 -6 200 70
42 -4 210 73
44 -3 220 76
46 -2 225 78
48 0 235 80
50 1 245 83
52 3 255 85
54 4 265 88
56 6 275 90
58 7 285 92
60 8 295 95
62 10 305 97
64 11 325 101
66 13 355 108
68 14 375 112
70 15 405 118 10
72 16 500 134
74 17 600 149
76 19 700 159

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
NOTES

FORM 150.72-NM3 (811)
The following factors can be used to convert from

English to the most common SI Metric values.
Table 1 - SI METRIC CONVERSION
MEASUREMENT MULTIPLY ENGLISH UNIT BY FACTOR TO OBTAIN METRIC UNIT
Capacity Tons Refrigerant Effect (ton) 3.516 Kilowatts (kW)
Power Horsepower 0.7457 Kilowatts (kW)
Flow Rate Gallons / Minute (gpm) 0.0631 Liters / Second (l/s)
Feet (ft) 304.8 Meters (m)

Length
Inches (in) 25.4 Millimeters (mm)
Weight Pounds (lbs) 0.4538 Kilograms (kg)
Velocity Feet / Second (fps) 0.3048 Meters / Second (m/s)
Feet of Water (ft) 2.989 Kilopascals (kPa)

Pressure Drop
Pounds / Square Inch (psi) 6.895 Kilopascals (kPa)
TEMPERATURE
To convert degrees Fahrenheit (°F) to degrees Celsius
(°C), subtract 32° and multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: (45.0°F - 32°) x 0.5556 = 27.2°C
To convert a temperature range (i.e., a range of 10°F)
from Fahrenheit to Celsius, multiply by 5/9 or 0.5556.
Example: 10.0°F range x 0.5556 = 5.6 °C range

P.O. Box 1592, York, Pennsylvania USA 17405-1592 Tele. 800-861-1001 Subject to change without notice. Printed in USA
Copyright © by Johnson Controls 2011 www.johnsoncontrols.com ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
Form 150.72-NM3 (811)
Issue Date: August 15, 2011
Supersedes 150.72-NM3 (909)

YorkDoc 150.72-nm3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

YorkDoc 150.72-nm3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

YorkDoc 150.72-nm3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

AIR-COOLED SCROLL CHILLER

INSTALLATION, OPERATION, MAINTENANCE Supersedes 150.72-NM3 (909) Form 150.72-NM3 (811)

Issue Date: Products are produced at a

DANGER indicates an imminently CAUTION identifies a hazard which

WARNING indicates a potentially NOTE is used to highlight additional

External wiring, unless specified as an optional connection in the manufacturer’s product

CHANGEABILITY OF THIS DOCUMENT

SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................17

SECTION 3 – HANDLING AND STORAGE.......................................................................................................35

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

SECTION 5 – TECHNICAL DATA......................................................................................................................45

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

SECTION 7 – UNIT CONTROLS......................................................................................................................137

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

SECTION 9 – SERVICE AND TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................177

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT’D)

LIST OF FIGURES (CONT.)

SECTION 1 – GENERAL CHILLER INFORMATION AND SAFETY

The unit warranty will be void if any modification to the

The unit must not be operated outside the design

Pressure Systems Sharp Edges

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

SECTION 2 – PRODUCT DESCRIPTION

INTRODUCTION GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The evaporator is constructed, tested and stamped in DISPLAY/PRINT of typical information:

A color coded 12-button non-tactile keypad provides

UNIT ON/OFF switch

Provisions are included for pumpdown at shutdown;

* Intensity of Protection European Standard

ACCESSORIES AND OPTIONS

POWER OPTIONS POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITORS

HOT GAS BY-PASS HYDRO-KIT

LOUVERED PANELS (CONDENSER COIL SOUND ATTENUATION

FIG. 1 – UNIT COMPONENTS FRONT

UNIT COMPONENTS (CONT)

FIG. 2 – UNIT COMPONENTS SIDE

CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS

FIG. 3 – POWER PANEL COMPONENTS

CONTROL / POWER PANEL COMPONENTS (CONT)

FAN FUSES MICROCOMPUTER

FIG. 4 – POWER PANEL / CONTROL COMPONENTS

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN)

BASIC UNIT NOMENCLATURE

BASE PRODUCT TYPE NOMINAL UNIT REFRIGERANT VOLTAGES STARTER DESIGN/DEVELOPMENT

FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)

FEATURE FEATURE DESCRIPTION OPTION OPTION DESCRIPTION

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (PIN) (CON’T)

AIR COOLED CONDENSERS

YLAA REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM

OPTIONAL DISCHARGE TXV

LOW PRESSURE SWITCH OR RETURN WATER

FIG. 5 – REFRIGERANT FLOW DIAGRAM

PROCESS AND INSTRUMENTATION DIAGRAM

FIG. 9 – SINGLE-POINT SUPPLY CONNECTION – TERMINAL BLOCK, NON-FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH